Tài liệu về Giáo án tiếng anh lớp 7

Chia sẻ: lvutta2010

At the end of the lesson, the students will be able to greet one another and introduce themselves.

Bạn đang xem 20 trang mẫu tài liệu này, vui lòng download file gốc để xem toàn bộ.

Nội dung Text: Tài liệu về Giáo án tiếng anh lớp 7

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Preparatory date :1/9
Teaching date :
Period : 1
Back to school
Unit one:
A. Friends ( A1 + A3 )
I/ Objects
At the end of the lesson, the students will be able to greet one another and
introduce themselves.
II/ Language contents
1, New words: classmate, so am I, me too
2, Structures: Nice to see you, Nice to see you again.
III/ Teaching aids.
Make a syllabus.
Prepare pictures, a tape and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching produces
Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up 1, Warm up
(5’) (5’) Answer the questions of the
Make questions: teacher.
What’s your name?
How are you today?
Are you happy to meet your
2,Presentatio classmates after long summer
n vacation?
(15’) Uses the picture to introduce the
new lesson: They are bang and
Oh. Oh is a new student.
How do they greet one another? Listen to the tape
Hi, Hello or Good morning? Look at the books and repeat
Opens the tape twice after the tape.
Asks the students to look at the
books and listen to the tape Work in the small groups
again. 3 students stand up and
Let’s them work in the small practice
groups.
Calls some groups to practice
the dialogue.
Explains the different between
two sentences.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 1
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Nice to see you and Nice to see Listen and repeat
you again. Answer the questions
( can replace see by meet) Her name is Hoa.
Opens the tape again. She is in class 7a.
Makes questions: Nam is also in class 7a.
What’s the new girl’s name? Look at the books.
3, Practice What class is she in?
(15’) Who is also in class 7a? Read after the teacher.
Tells the students to look at the Listen and put the sentences,
sentences which are in the book which are in the book.
Asks them to read. Give the keys .
Opens the tape( each Practice
paragraph).
Calls the students give their
keys. Greet each other
Corrects their mistakes.
Lets students make the dialogue
again Do this exercise
Now our class has a new Give the correct dialogue.
4,Production student Hello, Lan.
(5’) How will we greet her? Hello, Hung.
Tells them to use the everyday How are you?
English. Very well, thanks. And you?
Arrange the order dialogue. I’m fine.
I am fine. Well, here is my bus. Bye
Hello, Lan. Hung.
How are you? Good bye, Lan. See you
Well, here is my bus. Bye Hung. soon.
Hello, Hung.
Very well, thanks. And you?
Good bye, Lan. See you soon.
*Put the one word into lacks to
5, Homework compete the following
(5’) sentences.
I’m ....... new student.........class
7a
I live..........Tran Phu Street. I
live .
........my parents and
..........sister
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 2
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Learn by heart the new words
and the structures.
Rewrite the dialogue in the your
notebooks.
Do ex. 1,2 (3,4 st)




B/Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 2
A/ Friends (A2+ A5= A6)

I/ Objects.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to read fluently and can listen
it.
II/ Language contents
1, Vocabulary: still, different, lots of, a lot of, miss, unhappy.
2, Structures: She lives with her uncle.
Her new school is bigger than her old school.
III/ Teaching aids.
Make a teaching plan.
Prepare some pictures, a tape and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching procedure .
Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Uses the picture to introduce Listen to the teacher carefully.
(5’) the new lesson; this is Hoa.
She is from Hue. Now she lives
with her aunt. This is a new
school in Hanoi.
- Or uses the picture to ask. Listen and answer these
Do you remember this girl? questions
Where is she from?
How many schools are there?
Which school is bigger?
2, - Reads the reading twice. Listen to the teacher.
Presentation - Lets the students read it Read the reading.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 3
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
swiftly
- Calls some students to
read.
- Corrects their mistakes. Answer the questions about
Hoa.
- Make some questions about
-She is from Hue.
Hoa.
She staying with her aunt and
Where is she from?
her uncle.
Who is she staying with?
No, she doesn’t.
Does she have a lot of friends
Her new school is bigger her old
in Hanoi?
school.
How is her new school different
Because she misses her
from her old school?
parents and her friends.
Why is she unhappy?


Tell about Hoa.
Asks the students to tell about
3, Practice Practice in pairs.
Hoa.
Speak loudly.
Asks the students to practice in
pairs( speak about their old
school
- It has ...........
- It is bigger/ smaller.........
Goes around the class to help
Can write on the paper.
weak students, remind
students to use words, phrases
to speak
- listen to teacher.
Let them write on the paper.
- Practices with a partner.
Corrects their mistakes if they
have.
*A3:Introduces it by asking
some questions about the
picture. Then opens the tape.
-Asks some the students make
Read the sentences .
a dialogue again.
- Listens and corrects their
4, Production. mistakes. Guess the keys.
(5’) Listen it.
* Speaks aim of the listening.
Tells them to read these
sentences which are in the
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 4
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
box. Listen it carefully.
Can ask them to guess the Give the ideas.
keys.
Opens the tape Listen to and write in the books
Gives the correct keys.
Opens the tape again to
check.
5, Homework *Opens each sentence.
(5’) - Corrects the mistakes.
1- c, 2- b, 3- d, 4- a.
Rewrite the reading in the
books and answer the
questions.
Learn by heart .
Do ex. 3,4 ( 4 sbt)




V/ Draw experience




Preparatory date: 1/9
Teaching date:
Period 3
B/ Name and addresses.(B1+ B2)
I/ Objects .
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to introduce the thirth
person and consolidate ”WH” question.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: family name, surname, middle name, first name.
2, Structures: What is your family name?
My family name is Pham.
Where do you live ?

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 5
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
I live at .........
III/ Teaching aids .
- Make a teaching plan.
- Prepare pictures, a tape and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching procedures .
Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Uses the picture to ask Listen and answer
(5’) students -They are students.
- Who are they? -They are in the class.
- Where are they? -They are learning.
-She is teaching/ asking.
- What are they doing?
- What is the teacher doing? -They are answering.
What are the students -They are talking themselves
-
2, Listen and repeat.
doing?
Presentation - What are they talking Practice with a partner.
(20’) about?
Speak loudly.
Opens the tape twice.
Asks the students to practice
in groupworks.
Calls some groups to speak
loudly.
Listens and correct their Listen and read.
mistakes if they have.
Explains the meaning of the
new words: Pham Thi Hoa.
Read again.
- Pham: Family name.
Answer the questions.
- Thi: Middle name.
- Hoa: First name.
She is talking to Miss Lien.
Guides students reading.
Lets students answer the Her family name’s Pham.
Her middle name’s Thi.
questions by asking them.
- Who is Hoa talking to?
- What is Hoa’s family She lives at 12 THD Street.
Practice with a partner.
name?
- What is her middle name?
- Where does she live?
3, Practice Talk sts to ask each other Answer
My family is .........
about Hoa.
My first name is.....
Listens and corrects.
about I live at/ in.................
Asks students
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 6
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
themselves.
Ex. What is your family Her/ His family is............
name?
What is your middle Look at the picture and answer
name?
Where do you live? They are Nga and Lan.
Lets a student talk about her They are talking about Miss
or him: What is her/ his family Lien.
name? Listen and complete this
*B2: Asks sts to look at the dialogue.
picture and ask each other:
- Who are in the Give the keys.
conversation? Listen and correct.
- What are they talking
Work in pairs.
about?
( In the conversation between
Nga and Lan. There is a lack
4, Procedure of WH questions in the right
Do this exercise
place)
Writes on the board.
Corrects and gives the keys.
( who, who, what, where,
where, how)
Lets sts practice in pairs
Practice with a partner
Goes around the class to help
weak students.
• Make complete sentences
5, Homework
(5’) from the following words.
Rewrite in the notebooks
- Where/ your parents/ live/
- They/ live/ 30 Ba trieu
street/
- How old/ your brother/?
- Who/ teaching/ English/
class
*B3: Explains doing
Guides asking
• Game: Word square.

Learn by heart
Do ex.1,2(5 sbt)
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 7
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Guides doing


V/ Draw experience
Preparatory date: 3/9
Teaching date:
Period 4
B/ Names and addresses (b3+b4+b5)
I/ Objects
By the end of the lesson the students will be able to ask the distance and talk
about means of transport.
II/ Language contents
1, Vocabulary: How far, from....to, near, far, about, meters, kilometers
2, Structures: a.How far is it from...........to.........?
It is not far/ near- about........meters/kilometers
b. How do/ does..........go to........?
......go to...........by bike/ bus.....
III/ Teaching aids
Prepare a book, a tape and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching procedure
Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up. Uses the picture to introduce Look at the book to answer
the new lesson by asking some
questions: How many people -There are five.
are there in the picture?
- Where are they? -They are on the street.
- What are they doing? -They are going to school/ to
These students are going to work.
school by bike( tell about Listen to teacher.
means of transport) because it
Listen carefully
is not far( tell about distance)
2, Repeat after the tape.
Opens the tape twice.
Presentation Then asks sts to repeat the
Work with a partner
dialogue.
Speak in front of class
Lets sts work with a partner.
Calls some pairs to speak
aloud.
Listen and correct their

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 8
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
mistakes if they have. Read these words
Explains the new words:
-How far, from....to, far, not far, Repeat and write.
near, not near, how.......go, by
bike
Asks sts repeat the structures:
-How far is it from your house
to school? It is not far- about 1
kilometers. Look at the pictures and listen
- How do you go to school? Read loudly these words
I go to school by bike.
*B5: Pre- listen., asks sts to
look at the 4 pictures to know Answer these questions:
these places: market, movie - It is ..........
theater, post office, bus stop.
Uses the questions to ask sts:
- How far is it from your Practice with a partner.
Work in small groups or with a
house to school/ market/
partner
movie theater/ post office/
3, Practice Speak loudly.
bus stop?
Tells sts to practice with a
Practice
partner
Asks sts to practice free by
Listen and write.
using the structures over.
Goes around the class to
listens and helps the weak sts
Can use the other pictures to
practice or draw some
Give the keys
distances
Correct
*B6: Pre- listen , asks sts to
look at the picture and speak
these places.
Talks the aims of the listening:
write 4 distances
- school to Lan’s house : 300
Listen and answer
meters.
- Lan’s house to post office :
4, Production 700 meters.
- School to movie : 3
kilometers.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 9
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- Movie theater to post office: Write on the paper.
2 kilometers
Calls sts to practice.
- What is your family name? Listen and write
5, Homework - Where do you live?
- How far is it from here?
- How do you often go to
school?
Ask sts to write a survey
Learn by heart.
Write B6 in the notebooks.
Do ex.3,5(sbt)
V/ Draw experience



Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 6
Unit two: Personal information
A/Telephone numbers(A1+A2+A3)
I/ Objects.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to speak or read numbers
and telephone numbers, use the future simple.
II/ Language contents .
1, Vocabulary: number, telephone, will, excuse me, telephone directory,
2, Structures: What is your telephone number? 8 263 019
I will call you soon.
III/ Teaching aids.
Prepare a book, a tape and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching procedure.
Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1,Warm up Asks sts to tell about them by Tell about them.
using the structures which they
have just learn. Then asks Answer.
questions: Does your family Yes/ No
have a telephone?
Introduces: Nowadays, Listen to teacher.
telephone has been very

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 10
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
popular in our social
communication. Thus, it is
necessary for English learners
to have a skill of using and
understanding telephone in
their study. In this lesson, we
2, will deal these matters. Look at the books.
Presentation Lets sts look at the book and
guess what is this. Answer( can answer by
Asks: Where is this page from? Vietnamese)

Explains: telephone number. Listen and read.
- Guides reading telephone
number: Stop after the coke,
and read 3 number.
Ex. 030 772 348
04 655 780 Practice with a partner and say
Tells sts to read the telephone the telephone number for
numbers which are in the book, these people
and work in pairgroups
Note: 800, 111, 222, 000
3, Practice You will listen to some people’s
telephone numbers. You write
down the number you hear. Listen to the tape and write.
Opens the tape twice.
Asks sts to compare with the
number you write. Check the keys.
Calls some sts to check
Open the tape again
*Asks sts to look at the picture Listen and answer these
and asks some questions: questions.
- Do you often talk with some
on the phone?
- Do you know the question
asking for telephone
number?
- Do you know how to give
Listen to the tape.
your telephone number to
Write in the notebooks.
other people?
Practice with a partner.
Opens the tape and explains:
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 11
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
What is your telephone
number? Reads these telephone
4, Production numbers
I will call you soon. Listen and answer.
Gives some telephone
numbers to practice
Asks the question. Work in small groups
- Do you have a phone? Complete the list which is in
- What is your telephone the page 20.
Rewrite in the notebooks.
number
5, Homework Lets sts write in the list
Correct the mistakes.

Learn by heart.
Write 6 sentences about
personal information.

V/ Draw experience




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 5
B/ Names and addresses(b6+b7)
I/ Objects.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to practice listening , writing
and asking the distance of the 2 places, use the structure: How far is it
from...........to?
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: Use the words about places and distances.
2, Structures: How far is it from.........to?
It is about ............
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 12
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- Prepare a book, a tape and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching produces.
Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up *Asks sts some personal Listen and answer teacher’s
information: Where do you questions.
live
Is it far/ near from your
school?
How far? Look at the picture and ask.
How do you go here?
*Shows the picture and asks: Read these words.
What is this/ that?.....to
introduce the new words:
2, Presentation Lan’s house, school, market, Look at it and answer
theater,
post office
- Asks sts to look the
picture
- Asks some questions
about the picture: Is Lan’s
Listen.
house far or near from
Give the keys
school?
- Speaks the aim of the
Listen and check
listening: Find out 4
distances in the tape
- Opens the tape
Rewrite in the notebooks
- Calls some sts to tell the
keys
- Open the tape again, stop
each sentence to check:
a. school to Lan’s house:
300 meters.
b. Lan’s house to post
3, Practice Practice with a partner.
office: 700 meters.
c. School to movie theater:
Speak loudly.
3kilometers.
d. Movie theater to post
office: 2 kilometers
- Opens the tape again and
tell sts to practice with a
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 13
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
partner
- Let them work in small Listen carefully to do
groups by using other
words.
- Explains the exercise( b7-
18 page).
Listen and answer , then write
- Gives an example:
your personal information in
Name: Vu Thi Mai.
the paper. Can check with a
Address: 56 Le Loi street.
partner
Means of transport: by bus.
Distance: about 1 kilometer
- Calls a student to practice
by answer the questions
What is your full name?
4, Production Where do you live?
Ask each other
How do you go to school?
How far is it from your house
to school?
- Goes around class to
help weak sts
- Consolidate asking and
Look at the drawing and ask
answering the distance
each other
and the means of
transport by letting sts
ask each other.
- Listens and corrects their
mistakes if they have
5, Homework - Can draw the distances
Rewrite these aims of teacher.
Market.......................School

Post office

Bank.......................Bus stop

Practice with a classmate by
using the structures that they
have learn.
Do ex. 3,5(6,7- sbt)
V/ Draw experiences

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 14
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 7.
Unit two: A/ Telephone numbers( A4+ A5+A6+ A7)
I/ Objects.
By the end of the lesson, the studends will be able to practice asking for and
giving telephone numbers, can use the future simple tense.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: free, see a movie, start, don’t be late.
2, Structures: Will you be free tomorrow? Yes, I’ll.
What time will it start? It’ll start at7 o’clock.
Where will we meet?
We’ll meet in front of the movie theater.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching procedures .
Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up -Asks some questions: -Listen and answer.
Do you have a telephone? Yes, I have.
What is your telephone 030 772 864
number? Do you know how to No.
give your telephone number
to others? -Look at it and answer.
-Lets sts look at the picture
and answer the questions. Phong and Tam.
Who are they in the picture? They are talking on phone.
What are they doing? ( by students)
What are they talking about?
2, Can you guess? -Look at the dialogue and listen
Presentation. -Now look at the dialogue and to tape.
listen to the tape to know
what they are talking about. -Repeat .
-Plays the tape twice, and
asks them repeat -Read these words.
-Gives the new words: see a
movie, start, great, late, free -Work in pairs.
-Have the sts work in pairs.
-Have the pairs role- play the - Practice with a partner.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 15
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
dialogue, with one student
playing Lan and the other
playing Hoa.
-Listen to them and correct in
pronunciation .
-Ask the questions: Phong and Tam.
Who will meet tomorrow? They will see a movie.
What will they do? At 6.45
What time will they meet? They will meet in front of the
Where will they meet? movie theater.
Give sentences:
- We’ll meet in front of the
movie theater.
- Would you like to come to
my house?
- Let’s meet.
Look at it and read.
- Don’t be late.
3, Practice. Copy the form onto the board
Answer the teacher’s questions
and ask the sts to read it. Pre-
Yes, I do.
listening, the teacher asks
some questions: -Do you
sometimes go to the movies?
Would you like....?
-What do you say
to ask your friends to go to
Listen and fill this form.
the movies with you?....
Play the tape and ask one or
two sts to come up and fill it
Practice with a partner.
out in front of the class.
Have the sts cross- check
Correct yourself mistakes.
their form with a partner.
Make any comments.
4, Production Make a conversation about
In order to consolidate
themselves.
speaking on the phone, the
teacher asks the sts to make
a conversation about
Read the dialogue and role-
themselves.
play.
Listen and correct.
Then let them read the
dialogue, ask the sts to role-
Answer these questions.
play it.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 16
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Have one or two pairs make
5, Homework. up it in front of the class. Listen and copy into the
Ask these questions. notebooks
Learn by heart
Make a conversation with
classmates.
Write answers into notebooks.
Complete the form that is in
21 page. Listen , read and write these
ordinal numbers and cardinal
Explain the differences from ones.
cardinal number and ordinal
numbers.
One First (1th)
Two Second(2th)
Three Third(3th)
Fourth(4 th)
Four
Fifth(5 th)
Five Look at the picture and answer
th
Six Sixth(6 )....... a question:
Ask the sts to look at the It is calendar.
picture and make a question:
What is this? It is a calender.
Give the meaning of this
word.Now you must listen and Listen the tape.
write the dates of July. Practice with a partner.
Play the tape twice.
Can ask the sts to work in
pairs. Listen and correct the
Call on some sts who give mistakes.
ideas themselves. Read and write.
Check and give the keys.
- The first of July.
- The nineteenth.
- The sixth.
- The fourteenth.
4, Production There are 12 months in a year.
- The seventeenth.
They are
- The thirty- first.
Ask the sts: Now many January......December
months are there in a year?
What are they? Now you are
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 17
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
going to write the months in
their correct order, using Go to board and write on it.
ordinal numbers.
Have the sts work individually.
Ask one or two sts to write
their answers on the board.
5, Homework Make any necessary Rewrite into notebooks
corrections.
After that, note reading
ordinal numbers.
Learn by heart ordinal
numbers and the months.
Write them into notebooks


V/ Draw experience.
Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 8
Unit two: B/ My birthday(B1+ B2+ B3)
I/Objects.
By the end of the lesson, the sts will be able to speak ordinal number and
dates fluently, review the months.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: Ordinal numbers and the dates.
2, Structures:
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching procedures.
Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Ask the sts to repeat the Go to the board and speak .
ordinal numbers, which they
learnt in class 6.
Then use the part one to Look at it and listen
introduce the ordinal numbers.
2, Play the tape and have the sts Listen to the tape.
Presentation listen it carefully.
Read the numbers aloud to the Read after the teacher.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 18
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
sts Read individually.
Go around the room, and ask
each individual student to read
the numbers aloud.
Call on some sts read in front
of the class. Write them into the
Rewrite the ordinal numbers on notebooks.
the board. Listen and repeat.
Play the tape again and ask
the sts to repeat them. Work with a partner.
Let the sts work with a partner.
Listen and make any
necessary corrections. Listen and read these
3, Practice Give some numbers and have numbers.
the sts practice by speaking
and writing.
16th, 20th, 31th, 12th, 5 th.....
16, 20, 31, 12, 5.....
Explain pronuciation”th”.
Call on the sts read them
again.

Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 9.
Unit two: B/ My birthday(B4+ b5)
I/ Objects.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to ask and answer about
birthdays and use the future simple tense.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: birthday, date of birth, nervous, worry, worried.
2, Structures: What’s your /her date of birth?
When is your / her birthday?
- June eighth. I’ll be 14 on my next birthday.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching procedures.
Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 19
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
1, Warm up Ask the sts to speak the ordinal Speak and write them.
numbers and have them write
big holiday in Vietnam.
Use the picture to introduce the Look at the picture and answer
new lesson by making the the questions.
questions: Who are they?
What are they
talking about? Can you Guess what Mr Tan is asking
guess what Mr Tan is asking Hoa.
Hoa? Listen to tape carefully.
Now you listen to the
conversation and guess what
2,Presentati Mr Tan is talking to Hoa. Listen and read it.
on Play the tape twice and tell the
sts to read the dialogue while
listening to the tape.
Let them work in pairs. Role-play the dialogue with a
Have the sts role- play the partner.
dialogue, with one student
playing Lan and other playing Read these words and write.
Hoa .
Explain the new words: Find the questions and
nervous ,worried, date of birth, compare.
birthday..
Then ask the sts to find the
teacher’s questions and Practice again the dialogue
compare with your ones.
Asks the sts to practice with a Read them and answer
partner.
Have the sts read the Listen and correct mistakes
questions in the book. Then yourselves
make them.
Give the correct answers:
- Hoa is 13 year old .
- She will be 14 on her next
birthday.
Practice with a partner.
- Her birthday is on June
eighth.
3, Practice Listen and answer the teacher’s
- Hoa live with her uncle and
questions.
aunt.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 20
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Ask the sts to practice with a
partner about Hoa.
Now your will talk about Then talk about yourselves.
yourselves. First, the teacher
can make questions and the
sts answer
- What is your family name?
- Where do you live?
Talk about the third person
- How old are you?
4, - When is your birthday?
Production Read again the dialogue.
- How old will you be on your
next birthday?
After that, have the sts talk
Copy the form in the notebooks
about the third person.
and fill out it.
In order to controlled practice,
the teacher ask the sts to read
again the dialogue. After that ,
Check the mistakes yourselves.
explain the aims of the
exercise.
Copy the form onto the board.
Write in the notebooks.
Ask one or two sts to fill out the
5, form at the board.
Homework Make any necessary corrects.
Have the sts write in the
notebooks.
Let them write .about
themselves
Learn by heart .
Talk about Hoa and about
yourself.
Do ex. 2,3(10-11SBT)

V/ Draw experience


Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 10.
Unit two: B/ My birthday(B6+ B7)
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 21
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
I/ Objects.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to read comprehension and
acquitted with an invitation card.
II/ Language contents .
1, Vocabulary: party, invite, finish, hope, join the fun.
2, Structures: My birthday is on.......
The party will be at......
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape and a cassette- player.
IV/ Teaching procedures.
Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1,Warm up. Make questions for the Listen and answer, then
students: write in the form.
- What is your name?
- When is your date of birth?
- Where do you live?
Look at the picture and
- What is your telephone
answer the questions.
numbers?
Have the sts look at the picture
2, and answer: -What is Lan
Presentation Listen to the teacher and
doing?
read the questions.
-What are they doing?
-She is 12.
Read the passage.
-She lives at 24 Ly Thuong
Have the students read the
Kiet Street.
passage
Ask the students answer the -She will invite some of her
friends.
questions about Lan such as:
-It’ll begin at 5 o’clock in the
-How old is Lan?
evening and finish at 9.
-Where does she live?
First, they can work with a
-When is her birthday?
partner then they speak in
-Who is she inviting to
front of the class.
her party?
-When will the party
begin and end?
Tell the students to imagine
what they would do if they had
to plan a birthday party, then
3, Practice call on several students to give Listen and compete this
their answers in front of the invitation.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 22
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
class. Work in the small groups
Listen to them carefully and
make any corrections.
Speak about the aim of this Speak in front of the class,
exercise: You must complete then correct mistakes
this invitation card to Lan’s yourselves.
party.
Have the sts work in the small
groups, then ask them to
complete the invitation card.
Correct their mistakes if they
have:
Dear Nam( Mai....) Listen to the teacher.
I am having a birthday party on
Sunday, May 25th. The party will
4, Production
be at my house at 24 Ly Thuong Work with a partner then
Kiet Street, from 5:00 to 9:00 practice in front of the class.
I hope you will come and join
the fun.
Love .
Explain the body of the letter
In order to practice the future Give the comments and
simple tense, the teacher has correct.
the sts do this exercise. First,
ask them to work with a partner
then they speak aloud in front of
the class.
Teacher listens and makes any
necessary corrections. Rewrite these exercises.
5, Homework Give the correct keys:
-We will give Lan a pen/ a
blouse..
-We will walk/ go by bike...
-We will play “ hide and seek”...
-We will eat cake and ice
cream...
-We will drink soft drinks...
-We will leave at 9:00
Read more time the reading.
Write an invitation to your
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 23
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
birthday party. Do ex.4, 5(11-12)
SBT

V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 11.
Unit three: At
home.
A/ What a lovely home!( A1)
I/ Objects.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to describe different rooms in
a house and preseny exlamations.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: awful, comfortable, lovely, bright, amazing, convenient, favorite,
rest of the house.....
2, Structures: What an awful day!
What a bright room!
What nice color!
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a cassette- player and a tape
IV/ Teaching procedures.
Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up - Put the correct tense of the Go to board and do this ex.
verbs: - ....will be..
I(be).......14 years old next - .....will you invite..
month.
Who..... you (invite)....to your - .... will you play..
party birthday?
What games.....you (play)......? Answer the teacher’s question
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 24
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
-Make some questions about ( by students)
the sts: How many rooms are
there in your house?
What are they?
2, What are there in each Look at the picture and listen
Presentation room? to the teacher.
Can you name?
Show the picture and ask Name the things which are in
some questions to introduce the picture
the new lesson, and ask the Read after the teacher.
sts to name things in this
picture ( they can speak by
Vietnamese ) Listen and repeat.
Listen and give comments.
- sink, tub, shower, bed... Work in pairs.
Play the tape twice for the sts. Role- play the dialogue.
Have the sts listen to the
dialogue while reading along Read these words and write
with it. them into the notebooks
Let the sts work in pairs.
Tell the sts to role- play the
dialogue. Listen the tape and repeat it
Explain the meaning of these again.
words: awful, comfortable, Practice the dialogue in front
lovely, bright, pink, favorite, of the class.
beautiful, modern, convenient. Listen and write them.
Play the tape again and ask
the sts to repeat it
Call on some pairs to practice
Explain the structure:
Exclamations
- Complaints: What an awful
day!
- Compliments: What a bright Read these questions.
3, Practice room!
Can five some examples for
sts: Work in pairs and find the
What an amazing kitchen! answers
What a beautiful room!
What a lovely living room! Speak the answers in front of
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 25
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
What a boring party! the class.
Now look at Now answer to Others listen and give
answer the questions in your comments
books.
Have the sts work in pairs. Tell
the sts that they will find the
answer in the dialogue.
Call some pairs, and give any
necessary corrections;
- The living room, Hoa’s bed
4, Production room, and the kitchen. Talk about yourselves
- Because it is bright and it
has nice colors: pink and
white.
Listen and write in the
- A sink, a tub and a shower.
5, Homework notebooks
A washing machine, a dryer,
a refrigerator, a dishwasher
and an electric stove.
Ask the sts to work with a
partner to talk about you
Cal some pairs to practice in
front of the class
Listen and give comments
Learn by heart the new words
and the exclamations.
Talk 5 sentences about your
house
V/ Draw experience.
Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period: 12
A/ What a lovely home! (A2)
Unit three:
I/ Objects.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use exclamations to
compliment and complain.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: complaint, expensive, wet, boring, bad, great, interesting,
delicious, dinner, compliment.
2, Structures: What a lovely room!

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 26
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape and a cassette- player.
IV/ Teaching procedures.
Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Ask one student to read the Read the dialogue and
reading and answer the answer the questions.
questions which are in the
book. Find the exclamations and
Have them find the write them.
exclamations in the dialogue. Listen to the teacher.
Use the exclamations which
the student has just write on
2, Presentation the board to introduce the Listen to the teacher
new lesson.
We have revised the
exclamations: The Look at the picture and write
exclamations contain both the the exclamations.
complaints and compliments.
Now you look at the pictures
and write the exclamations.
Have the sts write the
complaints and the
compliments in the
notebooks.
Go around the class to help
weak students. Read aloud these words.
Guide the sts read the new
words
Complaint, compliment,
expensive, boring, wet, bad,
great, interesting, delicious,
dinner. Write the sentences on the
Let them read these words, board.
then call on several students
to read again.
Listen and correct their Read after the teacher.
mistakes.
Call on one or two students to Rewrite them on the
write their sentences on the notebooks.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 27
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
board and read them.
Correct the pronunciation for
students:
-What an awful restaurant!
-What a wet day!
3, Practice -What a boring party! Look at these pictures to
-What a bad movie! describe
-What a great party!
-What a bright room!
-What an interesting room!
Give some pictures of things
and people and ask the Speak and write.
students describe them by
using the exclamations:
What +a/ an +adj + noun!
4, Production What + adj + noun! Give the adjectives: tall , big,
First, ask the sts to speak, interesting, bad..etc..
and then they write them on
the board .
Make any necessary Look at the things and people
corrections the teacher has just draw.
Ask the sts to give the
adjectives
Use these adjectives to have
the sts talk the felling about
5, Homework. people and things. Rewrite them into the
Can draw the things or the notebooks.
people
*Or ask the sts to use these
adjectives to speak.
Interesting boring
Beautiful bad
Hot warm
Write 6 exclamations.
Learn by heart
Do exercises 2(13_ sbt)

V/ Draw experience.


Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 28
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh


Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 13
A/ What a lovely home!(A3)
Unit three:
I/ Objects.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to describe things in the
house or rooms, and use the prepositions of positions.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: closet, sink, refrigerator, stove, washing machine, dishwasher,
dryer
2, Structure: Is there a/ an.........? Are there.............?
Where is it? Where are they?
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape and a cassette- player.
IV/ Teaching procedures.
Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Make some questions for the Listen and answer.
sts - It is a pen. What a beautiful
- What is this? pen.
- Where is it? - It is on the table....
( teacher can use the pen/
book/board.... to ask)
- How many rooms are there
in your house? What are
2, they? Look at the picture and answer
Presentation - What is in your bedroom?
Have the sts look at the
- There is a table.
picture which is in the books
- There is a window with a
Make the questions:
- What is in the picture? curtain.
- There are two lamps.
- There are some chairs.
Listen the teacher and answer

Request the sts to ask and
answer about things that you

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 29
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
have told about and its
position in the picture in your
books.
Guide them: Where is it? Work with a partner.
It’s on the stand.
( There is a television on a
stand) Speak loudly in front of the
Have the sts work with a class.
partner Correct the mistakes
Call on some pairs and ask yourselves.
them to practice in front of the
class.
Listen and correct their
mistakes if they have. Practice with a partner.
3, Practice - There is a bonsai tree in a
planter on a stand.
- There are flowers in a vase Speak in front of the class.
on top of the table.
................................................
.....
Can read these words which
Ask the sts to use the words
are in the box.
which are in the box to ask
and answer:
- What is in the picture?
There is a bookcase, with
books and newspapers on
Use the structures, which the
the wall?
4, Production teacher has just given to ask
- Is there a vase of flowers ?
each other.
Yes, there is.
Practice in pairs.
- Where is it?
It is on top of the table.
Go around the class to help
weak students
Ask the sts to use the things
that are in their class to
practice.
5, Home work. Listen and write the ex.
- Are there four windows in
your classroom? Yes / No.
- Is there a board in your
classroom? Yes.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 30
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- Where is it? It is on the
wall.
Listen the sts and make any
necessary corrections.
Guide the sts do the
exercises: 3, 4( 14, 15- sbt)
Ask and answer about the
things which are in your
house or your room( 5
sentences)

V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 14.
B/ Hoa’s family(B1+B2)
Unit three:
I/ Objects .
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to speak, ask and answer
about occupations, practice reading comprehension.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: countryside, grow, raise, hard, from....to, job, photo.
2, Structures: What does your father do? He’s a farmer.
Where does he work? He works on the farm.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a cassette- player and a tape.
IV/ Teaching procedures.
Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Use the picture of the house Describe the picture of the
and ask the sts to describe it house.
(Use the structure the
exclamation and the

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 31
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
preposition of position) Listen to the teacher.
Talk about yourself: My
name’s...I am a teacher. I
2, teach English in Dong Giao Look at the picture and
Presentation school answer.
Show the picture and ask: -They are Hoa’s parents.
-Who are they in the picture? -They are working.
-What are they doing? -They are farmers.
-What are their jobs? -They work on the farm.
-Where do they work? -Yes, they do.
-Do they work hard? Listen to the tape.

Now you will listen to the
conversation about Hoa’s Read aloud the dialogue.
parents. They are farmers.
Play the tape twice, and ask
the sts to listen and read the Work in pairs.
dialogue at the same time. Role- play the dialogue.
Have the sts work in pairs
Ask the sts to role- play the
dialogue then have them
revere their roles. Listen, read and write
Make any necessary
corrections.
Give the meaning of the new
words: countryside, grow Listen and answer the
vegetable, raise cattle, work teacher’s questions
hard, from.... still, housework,
job...
Make questions about Hoa’s
family.
- What does Hoa’s father do?
He is a farmer.
- Where does he work? On Talk about the farmers.
3, Practice the farm.
- What is her mother’s job?
She is a housewife
Talk about yourself.
Have the sts work in pairs to
- My father is a worker.
talk about the farmers.
Go around the class to help the
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 32
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
groups. - He works in the factory.
Then ask the sts about
themselves:
- What does your father/
4, Production mother/ sister/ brother do? Look at the picture and
- Where does he/ she work? answer the questions.
Listen and give any necessary
Read it carefully.
corrections.
Now look at the picture and
answer the questions: Who is
this? What does he/she do?
Where does he/ she do?
You read the reading and you
will know about Lan’s family.
Ask and answer about Lan’s
Give the new words: hospital,
family.
take care of, a primary school,
journalist, a Ha Noi newspaper.
Talk about yourselves.
Ask them read the new words
and the reading.
Listen and write into the
Then practice with a partner by
5, Homework notebooks.
asking about the Lan’s family.
Listen and correct their
mistakes.
After that have the sts talk
about themselves.
Learn by heart.
Talk about your friend’s family,
and your family.

V/ Draw experience.


Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 15.
B/ Hoa’s family(B3+B4)
Unit three:
I/ Objects.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to talk about occupations
and listen comprehension to complete three form.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 33
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: about the occupations.
2, Structures: The present simple tense with occupations
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching procedures.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Ask the sts to talk about your Go to the board and answer
friend’s family. the questions.
Answer the teacher’s
questions:
- What does your father/
mother do?
- Where does he/ she do?
If your father is a teacher,
2, where he works.
Presentation Look at the books and listen
Have the sts look at B3 .
the teacher.
Explain the aim of this
exercise: You have 4 names of
jobs and their definitions on the
other side. However, these
definitions are mismatched
orderly with the names with the
Work with a partner.
most suitable definitions.
Speak loudly in front of the
Ask the sts to match with a
class.
partner
Compare with keys
Call on some sts and ask them
yourselves.
to answer.
Give the correct keys:
- A farmer works on a farm.
- A doctor takes care of sick
people.
- A journalist writes for
newspaper.
- A teacher teaches in a
Copy them into the notebooks
school.
Listen the tape carefully and
*B4: Let the sts copy three
write necessary information.
form into their notebooks and
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 34
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
explain the aim of the listening. Read the keys.
Play the tape for each form.
- Tom is a teacher. He is 26
years old and teaches at a
high school.
- Susan is a journalist. She is
19 and writes for a
3, Practice magazine.
- Bill is 20 and he a nurse. He
works in a hospital.
Give the games:
A doctor/A nurse.
@ Guessing jobs.
- His name is Nam. He takes
care of sick people in the
hospital. What does he do?
A housewife
- My mother works hard every
day. She is always busy
- What does Hoa’s father do?
from morning till night. She
-Where does the doctor work?
does the housework. What
does she do?
-Why is she sad?
@ Write questions:
- Hoa’s father is a journalist.
4, Production - The doctor works in the
Work in small groups.
hospital.
- She is sad because she
misses her parents
5, Homework Write this exercise into your
Have the sts ask and answer
notebooks
about your friend’s
occupations.
Listen to them and correct their
mistakes if they have
Guess their jobs:
- This person cuts men’s/
woman’s hair.
- You go to this person when
you are sick.
- This person writes for
newspaper or magazine.
- This person works in a
library.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 35
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh


V/ Draw experience



Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 16
B/ Hoa’s family
Unit three: (B5+B6)
I/ Objects.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to describe apartments
using comparatives and superlatives.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: look for, advice, empty, furnished, suitable,
2, Structures: It is expensive.
It is more expensive.
It is the most expensive.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare books, a tape and a cassette- player.
IV/ Teaching procedure.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Call on one student to talk One student goes to the
about the family yourself. board and talks about the
Ask some questions: family yourself.
-Do you live in a house or an Listen and answer the
apartment? teacher’s questions.
-Which is more comfortable? -I live in a house/ an
Introduce the new lesson by apartment
talking about the picture that -The sitting room is more
is in the book: This is Mr Nhat comfortable.
and this Mr John. Mr John is Look at the picture and the
an English teacher from the books, listen to the teacher
USA. He is looking for an carefully.
apartment in Ha noi for his
family. He’s asking Mr Nhat
for advice. Now we listen and

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 36
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
read the conversation to know
what they are talking about.
2, Presentation Play the tape for the students. Listen to the tape and read
Play it a second time, and the dialogue.
have the sts read the dialogue
while listening to the tape.
Have the sts work in pairs.
Call some pairs and ask them Read individually in front of
to practice the dialogue. the class.
Listen and correct their
mistakes
Give the main new words: Listen and read them.
look for, advice, empty,
furnished, suitable, expensive Listen and write them into
Explain Comparatives (bigger, books.
better, more expensive, etc)
and superlatives( best,
3, Practice cheapest, more expensive, Read these questions.
etc)
Have them look at Now Work with a partner.
answer the questions in your
books.
Let them work with a partner Speak loudly in front of the
asking and answering the class.
questions.
Check their answer to make
sure the students understand Listen these answers and
the exercise. write them into notebooks.
Answer:
a. The one at number 27.
b. The one at number79.
c. The one at number 79.
d. The one at number 27. The
most suitable is the smallest
but is the newest of the three
4, Production apartments. It has two bed Listen .
rooms, a large modern
bathroom and a kitchen.
B6: Tell the students this Read through the letter, and
exercise will give them then fill it.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 37
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
practice in writing personal
letters.
Have the sts read through the
letter, then tell them to fill in
the blanks with the adjectives Read and correct.
in the box at the top of the
book.
(Can ask them to read these
5, Homework adjectives first, and then fill) Rewrite into notebooks
Have the sts read all the letter
and give any necessary
corrections( beautiful,
expensive, cheapest, small,
big, best)
Rewrite answers into
notebook.
Copy the letter and read it.

V/ Draw experience


Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 17
Language focus 1
I/ Objects.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use the structures which
they have just learnt speak fluently and do exercises exactly.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: Review all the vocabulary.
2, Structures: present simple tense, future simple tense, occupations,
adjectives, prepositions.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare the pictures that are in the books.
IV/ Teaching procedures

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Ask some questions about the Listen and answer the

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 38
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
students such as: teacher’s questions.
-What do you often do on -I often go to school on
Monday? Monday.
-Where will you do tomorrow? -I will go to school.
-Will you go to school -Yes, I will
tomorrow?
By asking the questions, the
teacher reviews the present
2, simple tense and the future Listen and do this exercise.
Presentation simple tense.
Ask the students to repeat the
structures and grammar, which
they have just learnt from unit1
to unit 3. Speak it in front of the class.
- Present simple tense.
- Future simple tense.
- Ordinal numbers.
- Prepositions.
- Adjectives.
Give the example.
- Occupations.
Correct the mistakes
Can ask them to give the
example for the part.
3, Practice Listen and correct their
mistakes
Listen to the teacher.
1- Tell the students to
complete the passages
Work with a partner
using the verbs in brackets.
Go around the class to help
weak students.
Write the sentences on the
Call on some sts and ask them
board.
to read the keys.
Listen
Listen and give any necessary
corrections: a. is/ lives/ are/
goes
First speak and then write the
b. are/ eat/ rides/
sentences yourselves on the
catch
board.
2- Guide the sts to write the
things Nam will do/won’t do
tomorrow
The first, can ask them to
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 39
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
speak , Correct the mistakes.
and then write. Listen and do this exercise.
-He will go to the post office,
but he won’t call Ba.
Call on some sts and have
them write their sentences that Rewrite these sentences into
they do. the notebooks.
Make any necessary
corrections.
4- Have the sts write the
answers for the question:
Where is my cat? By using the Work with a partner.
4, Production prepositions which are in your
books. Correct the mistakes and
Correct their mistakes if they rewrite them into notebooks.
have
-It’s under the table.
-It’s in front of the chair. One or two students read
-It’s behind the TV. again the ordinal numbers
-It’s next to the bookcase. Write these numbers
-It’s on the couch.
Tell the sts to write these
5, Homework people’s job titles. Listen and write
-He is a fireman.
-She is a doctor.
-She is a teacher.
-He is a farmer.
Ask the sts to repeat reading
and writing the ordinal
numbers
Give some numbers to the sts
write: 1st, 12th, 20th, 33rd,2nd,15th.
Rewrite all the exercises into
the notebooks.
Prepare the papers for the test
45’

V/ Draw experience

Name: .............................................
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 40
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Class:.......................

Written test (45’)
§iÓm Lêi phª cña c« gi¸o




I/ Write questions, begin with the words given(2m)
1, Hoa’s father is a farmer.
- What...................................................?
2, The doctor works in the hospital.
- Where........................................................................?
3, She will go to school at 6 o’clock.
- What time........................................................................?
4, It’s about 2 kilometers from my house to my school.
- How far.............................................................................?
II/ Supply the correct form of the verbs in the blanks.(2m)
1, Mai(be)............ my classmate. She(live).................with her brother at 23/6
Kim Dong street. We often(go).......................to school by bike because it(not
be)...............
far from our houses.
2, Tomorrow(be)...........................Hoa’s birthday. The
party(start).....................at 7 o’clock. I and my
friends(meet)....................................each other at Hoa’s house .I’m
glad(see)......................them there.
III/ Rewrite the following dates and months(2m)
2 thang 9:............................................. 30 th¸ng
4..................................
1 th¸ng 5:............................................. 20 th¸ng
11.................................................
8 th¸ng 3.....................................................
IV/Complete the passage, use the words given in the box(2m).

For, out, in, is, weekdays. with, old,
visit
My name.........Mai. I’m 12 years.................I’m a student ...........grade 7. I
live..........
my parents in Ho Chi Minh city. I go to school on..................... . At weekends, I
often
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 41
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
................my grandparents. Sometimes we go out...........dinner. We seldom
go...........
of the city.
V/ Use the correct adjective form.(2m)
1, He is a..........................student in my class.( good )
2, My new school is................than my old school.( big )
3, This house is ................................for my family.( comfortable )
4, The cars are ..............................than the bikes ( expensive )
The end

Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 19
Unit four: At school.
A/ Schedules ( A1+ A2 +A3)
I/ Objects.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to talk about the time, state the
time and know the subjects.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: The subjects .
2, Structures: What time is it now? It’s 7 o’clock.
It’s five past two/ It’s five to two.
What time do you get up? I get up at five o’clock.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a lock.
IV/ Teaching procedures.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up. To review the time, the teacher Listen and answer the
asks some questions: teacher’s questions ( can by
-What time is it? English or Vietnamese)
-What time do you go to
school?
Now you look at these clocks
2, and make questions and
Presentations answers. Listen and repeat.
Now you will hear the tape
saying different times . You

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 42
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
listen and repeat.
Play the tape , stop the each Some sts stand up and
sentence. speak loudly in front of the
Call some sts to speak these class.
sentences.
Listen and make any
necessary corrections
Have the sts make the Look at these clocks and
questions and answers for the make questions and
pictures. answers.
Listen and correct their Listen to the teacher and
mistakes. repeat speaking the time.
• What time is it?
- It is 7 o’clock.
- It is four fifteen/ It is a
quarter past four.
3, Practice Work in pairs about times
- It is nine forty/ It is twenty to
ten.
Let the sts work with a partner.
Answer the teacher’s
Ask the sts to look at A2 and
questions.
answer about you.
Work individually, based on
First, the teacher makes
own lives.
questions, and then the sts
Work in pairs: one asks the
work with a partner.
questions and the other
- What time do you get up?
answer.
I get up at five past thirteen.
Some pairs make questions
( By the students)
and answers in front o the
Can ask the sts other
4, Productions class.
questions that they aren’t in the
Guess . (can speak by
book.
Vietnamese)
-Ex. What time do you go to
school?
Listen to the teacher.
Request the sts to look at A3
Read after the teacher these
and ask: Do you know what it
words.
is.
Explain: Schedule.
Listen the aim of the
Introduce the subjects that they
listening.
are in the book: Math, English,
Music, History, Physic,
Physical education, Geography
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 43
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Speak the aim of the listening:
This schedule lacks some
information. They are either Copy the schedule in your
names of subjects or times of notebooks.
the lesson. Now you listen to it Listen to the tape and write
and write the needed the information that you
information. heard
5, Homework Ask the sts to copy the Correct own mistakes.
schedule in their notebooks.
Play the tape twice. Rewrite the exercises in the
Call on some sts and ask them notebooks.
to read the keys.
Correct the students’ mistakes
Learn by heart the new words.
Write the times that you do the
thing everyday.
Do ex.1(21- sbt)

V/ Draw experience




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 20
Unit four: A/ Schedules (A4+A5)
I/ Objects.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to ask and answer about
schedules, read for comprehension about subjects and schedules.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: other, subject, interesting, important, difficult.
2, Structures: What is she doing? She is studying Physic.
What time does she have her Physic class?
- She has her Physic class at 8.40
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare pictures, a tape and a cassette player.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 44
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
IV/ Teaching procedures.
Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Call on one st and ask him/ her Write the names of subjects
to write the names of subjects. and answer the questions.
Ask some questions ;
-Do you like English/ -Yes/ No...
Math.......? -I have English ...on Monday,
-When do you have Thursday and Saturday.
English/Math.....? Look at the pictures and
Now look at these pictures and answer the teacher’s
answer: Do you know what question.
2, they are doing?
Presentation Have them tell the names of Tell the names of subjects:
subjects that have in the Physic, Geography, Literature
pictures Music, Math, Physical
education.
Look at the clock and speak
Ask them to look at the clocks about the times.
and speak: What time is it Answer the questions of the
now? teacher.
Then ask: What is Lan doing?
What time does she Listen to the teacher and
have her Physic class? answer the questions of her/
Ask for the picture and listen to him.
the sts , correct their mistakes. Write and repeat these
After that, give the keys: sentences.
-Binh is studying Geography.
He has Geography class
at10.10
-Hung is studying Literature.
He has his Literature class at
9.20
-Loan is studying Music. She
has her Music class at 3.30
-Hoa is studying Math. She has
her Math class at 2.50 Work with a partner: one
-Mi is studying Physical asking and other answering.
Education. She has her Some pairs of them speak
Physical Education class at loudly in front of the class.
4.40
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 45
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Have the sts work with a Listen and write.
partner, then call on some
pairs and ask them to speak
3, Practice loudly on front of the class.
Listen and give any necessary
corrections.
Note the using the present
progressive tense and the Listen to the tape and read it
present simple tense. while you listen.
Now you listen to the Read the new words.
conversation between Hoa and
Thu. It speaks about the
schedules and the subjects Answer.
that they like best.
Play the tape twice, and ask -She has English classes on
them to read again. Wednesday and Thursday.
Listen and guide the sts -She has Math, Geography...
reading the new words: other, -Thu’s favorite subject is
important, difficult History.
4,Production Make some questions and Answer.
have them answer: We are studying English.
-When does Thu have ( Depend on their schedules)
English?
-What other classes does Thu
have on Thursday?
-What is Thu’s/ Hoa’s favorite Yes/ No.
5, Homework subjects? Rewrite in your notebooks.
Ask the sts about themselves.
Ex. What are you doing?
When do you have English
classes?
What other classes do you
have on
Monday/Wednesday...?
Do you like Math/
History...?
Write your schedules in your
exercise books.
Do ex.2.3( 21-22 sbt)
V/ Draw experience.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 46
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh


Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 21
Unit four: A/ Schedules.(A6+A7)
I/ Objects.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to read comprehension and
know the differences between schools in the USA and Vietnam.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: little, different from, uniform, hour, cafeteria, snack, popular,
activity, baseball.
2, Structures: different from.....
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare some pictures of schools in USA and Vietnam.
IV/ Teaching procedures.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Call on two sts, ask them Speak about their own
about their schedules. schedules
Make some questions about
America: Which country has Listen and answer the
capital city as Washington teacher’s questions.
DC? They can guess.
What do you know about
USA?
2, -USA: the Unites States of
Presentation America. Look at the picture and listen to
Show the picture and speak: the teacher.
This is a class in USA. Now
you will read the passage
about school in America and
decide the statements are Read carefully.
True or False. Compare with your classmates
Have the sts read the Read loudly
passage and check the
boxes. Listen and correct.
Call some sts and ask them to

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 47
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
read loudly the keys
Listen and give the comments
- a, T d, T Speak: Why is it T or F?
- b, F e, F
- c, F f, F
Can ask: Why is it T or F?
Explain:
- to be different from:
Schools in the USA are
different from schools in
Vietnam.
3, Practice Write the differences from
I am different from my
between schools in the USA
sister.
and Vietnam.
“ Football” in USA is
different from “ Football” in
England.
Give the new words for sts.
Listen and write these
Ask the sts write the
sentences into notebooks.
differences from between
schools in the USA and
Vietnam.( in groups)
Then they can read loudly in
Go around the class to help
front of the class.
the sts
Call on two sts to go to the
board and write .
Check and give the
comments:
- USA: Students don’t
usually wear school
4, Production uniform. Classes start at
Listen and read.
8.30 each morning and the
school day ends at 3.30 or
4o’clock.There are no
lessons on Saturday.
Read again these words. Then
- Vietnam: Students usually
read loudly the poem.
wear school uniform.
Go to the board and do this
Classes start earlier at 7
exercise.
o’clock. On Saturday, the
students still go to school
Play the tape
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 48
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Ask the students to read while
they listen it.
5, Homework Explain the new words:
several, Home Economics,
The world changes, River and Rewrite into notebooks.
mountain ranges.
• Write in correct order to
make meaning sentences:
- not/ American/ uniform/ do/
usually/ school/
wear/students
- 9.5/ at/ Thursday/ science/
Mai/ class/ on/ has/.
Rewrite and translate this
reading into Vietnamese.
Write 5 sentences about
schools in Vietnam.

V/ Draw experience.

Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 22
Unit four: B/ The library (B1)
I/ Objects.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to speak about the kinds of
books that are in the library by using demonstratives and prepositions of position.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: As you can see, rack, reader, on the left, on the right,at the back
of.
2, Structures: These shelves on the left have math and sience books.
There are readers, novels and dictionaries.
There is a book on the table.
III/ Teaching aids.
-Make a plan.
-Prepare a picture of the library.
IV/ Teaching procedures.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 49
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
1, Warm up Ask the sts to speak the Do the teacher’s requests
differences between schools
in the USA and Vietnam.
Make some questions about
subjects: How many subjects Name the subjects that they
do learn at school? learn.
Which subjects do
you like best?
Where do you go, if
you want to borrow books?
Now we will visit a library by
reading these following Listen to the teacher.
passages.
2, Show the picture and ask:
Presentation Who is this? Who are they? Look at the picture and answer
What time does the library the questions:
open?/ close? -It is a librarian./ They are
Name the racks that are in students
the picture. -It opens at 7am, and closes at
4.30
Play the tape twice, and ask -They are Math, English....
the sts listen to the tape.
Then read after it . Listen the tape and read it.
Explain vocabulary:
-As you can see
-on the left
-on the right
-at the back of. Read these words and write
-next door them into the books.
These racks have
magazines.
These shelves on the left
have Math and science
books.
Those shelves on the right
have history and geography
3, Practice books. Answer them
Make questions about the
reading.
Listen and corrects their
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 50
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
mistakes if they have. Then
give the keys: Work with a partner : one asking
-The magazines are on the and other answering.
racks near the science
books.
-The newspapers are on the Make a conversation with your
racks near the history books. classmates.
-The math and science
books are on the shelves on
the left.
-The history and ......are on
4, Production the shelves on the right. Look at the signs that are drawn
-They are at the back of the by the teacher and answer .
library.
Draw some prepositions of
the books and ask, using the
questions “ where” Work with a partner.
5, Homework Ex. Where is the history
book? Write in your notebooks.
Where are the
magazines?
Have the sts work with a
partner
Rewrite the reading and
translate into Vietnamese.
Answer again the questions
into the exercise notebooks.

V/ Draw experience.




Prepaeatoy date:
Teaching date:
Period 23
Unit four: B/ The library ( b2+b3 )
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 51
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
I/ Objects.
By the end of the lesson, yhe stdents will review prepositions of positions and
practice in asking and answering questions about location.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: in the middle, wellcome.
2, Structures: about the prepositions of positions.
III/ Teaching aids.
-Make a plan.
-Prepare a tape and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching procedures.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students activities
1, Warm up Use the picture of the library to Look at the picture and answer
ask for the students with “ the teacher’s questions.
where” Listen and answer the
If you go to the library, who teacher’s questions.
usually helps you find the books
and how do you ask for the
librarian?
Now you will listen to the
2,Presentati conversation between Nga and
on the librarian. Listen to the tape and read the
Play the tape and have the dialogue.
students to listen the dialogue.
Play the tape again and ask Work in pairs.
them read it while they listen.
Have the students work in pairs.
Ask them to role-play the Answer the questions:
dialogue, then have them - They are on the shelves on
reverse the roles. the left.
Make questions for the - They are on the racks in the
students: middle
- Where are the math books? Work with a partner by asking
- Where are magazines and and answering the questions.
newspapers?

To review the prepositions of Do the teacher’s requests
3, Practice positions, the teacher has the
students use the questions that
are in B1 to ask and answer.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 52
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Have the students label the
shelves and racks in their Listen the tape and write.
exercise book.
Now let’s guess the position of
the racks and shelves of books Provide the answers.
in the library.
Play the tape for the students.
Have the students write the Correct the mistakes.
locations of books.
Call some students read loudly
the information that they have
just heard.
1. Study area
2. Science + Math Speak again.
3. Geography
4+5. Newspapers and
Magazines Make free conversations
4, 6+ 7. English
Production 8. Librarian’s desk
After that, ask the students to
speak again the locations in
front of the class.
Make free conversations with
the students
Then ask them to practice with a
partner. Write in the notebooks.
Listen and correct their mistakes
5, if they have.
Homework Label the picture that is in B1
and have the students ask each
other.
Help the students to practice.
Review the question “where”
Do exercise: 1,2 (24-sbt)

V/ Draw experience.




Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 53
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh




Preparatory date
Teaching date:
Period 24
B/ The library ( B4 + B5 )
Unit four:
I/ Objects.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to read for comprehension
and remember the entire unit.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: receive, contain, million, employee, rocket, spare, adventure.
2, Structures: It is in Washington of theUSA.
It has over 100 million of books.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching procedures.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Label the shelves and racks on Look at the picture and write the
the board, ask the sts to write position of books on the board.
the location of the books.
Show the picture that is in the Look at the picture and guess
book and ask: Do you know that which the largest library in
which the largest library in the the world is?
2,Presentati world is? Read silently the passage and
on Now we’ll read silently about guess.
the largest library in the world
and answer the question:
Which is the largest library in
the word?
Go around the class to help Stand up and read

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 54
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
students reading.
Have one or two students read
the passage in font of the
class, listen and make any Write the answers in notebooks.
necessary corrections to
pronunciation. Compare with a partner.
Have students write the Read the own answers,
answers in their notebooks,
then ask them to compare with Listen and rewrite the correct
a partner. answers.
Call some students reading
these answers loudly in front of
the class. After that, give the
corrects answers:
-It is in Washington D.C, the
capital of the USA.
-It has over 100 million books Read them again.
-It has 1,000 km of shelves.
-Because it receives copies of
all American books. Read and write these new
Have students read again words.
these answers.
3, Practice Now explain the new words: Work in pairs.
Congress, capital, receive,
contain, employee. Practice in front of the class.
Have students work in pairs by
making and answering again
the questions, and then ask Listen and answer the teacher’s
them to practice in front of the questions.
class. -The National library.
Listen and correct their -It’s in Hanoi, on Trang Thi
mistakes street.
Make some questions about -Yes. Last Summer/ one time.
the local library: Which is the -Yes, because it has many kinds
4, largest library in Vietnam? of books.
Production Where is it?
Did you come Make a conversation.
there? * Example.
When or How -Yes.
often? -No, it isn’t. It is rather small.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 55
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Do you like it? -One a week.
Why? -I can find them on the shelves
Ask students repeat the on the right....etc
positions that are in unit 4. Tell some things about the
Use the picture that is in A1 to largest library in the world and in
make question Where Vietnam.
Make a conversation about the
library: -Is there a library in
your school? - Is it big?
- How often do you go Rewrite the teacher’s requests.
there? -Where can you find
5, the Math books?
Homework -Do you know which
the largest library in the world?/
in Vietnam? Tell some things
about it.
Listen and correct their
mistakes if they have.
Read B5.
Rewrite and translate the
passage into Vietnamese.
Prepare unit five.

V/ Draw experience.

Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 25
Work and play
Unit five:
A/ In class (A1)
I/ Objects.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to speak language used to
talk about school subjects.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: Use, computer, interested in, experiment
2, Stuctures: Do some experiments.
Learn how to use a computer.
And review the present simple tense.
III/ Teaching aids.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 56
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- Make a plan.
- Prepare some pictures , and a cassette player
IV/ Teaching procedures.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up. Write the words in the corrects Go to the board and do this
order to make meaningful exercise.
sentences:
-students/ have/ on/ lesson/
Vietnamese/ Saturday.
-interesting/ Geography/
subject/ an/ is.
Make questions: Listen and answer the
-How many day a week do you teacher’s questions:
go to school? -Six day a week.
-What time do classes start? -They start at 7 o’clock.
-How many subjects do you -About eight.
learn?
Now you listen to this passage
and you will know how to
2, answer these questions exactly
Presentation and clearly Listen, look at the pictures and
Play the tape for the students. read after the tape.
Have the students look at the
pictures and read the captions
under the each picture while Find the new words
listening the tape.
Ask them to find the new words
and explain these words:
-Computer science.
-Be interested in.
-Do experiments.
-map. Read after the teacher.
Call some students and ask
them to read it again.
Listen and correct their Work in pairs.
3, Practice mistakes. Practice in front of the class.
Ask the questions for each
picture.
Have students works in pairs.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 57
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Have one or two students ask Answer these questions:
their questions in front of the -Mai goes to Quang Trung
class. school.
Check the questions made up -Six day a week.
by the students. -At 7/ At a quarter past seven.
After that, give 5 questions:
-What school does Mai go? -It is difficult
-How many days a week does
Mai go to school? -Her lesson today is physics.
-What time do classes
4, begin/finish?
Presentation -What does Mai think about
Geography? Work with a partner.
-What is her lesson today?
• Talk about you.
Then talk in front of the class.
Can make some questions for
students:
-Which grade are you in?
-Do you go to school six days a
week?
-What do you think about your
subjects?
Rewrite into your notebooks.
-What is your favorite class?
5, Homework Why?
Listen and correct their
mistakes if they have.
Write 5 questions about Mai
and 5 ones about you.
Do exercise:
Prepare next lesson.

V/ Draw experience.




Name:.......................................................................Class: 9................
Written test (45’)
§iÓm Lêi phª cña c« gi¸o
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 58
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh




I/ Use the correct form of verbs in the parentheses
1, He wishes he ( be )...........................a doctor in the future.
2, If I ( be )....................you, I ( not do )...................................that.
3, My brother ( not go )...............................out since he failed in his exam.
4, He used to (go)..............to school by bike, but now he’s used to
(walk).................to it .
II/ Choose the correct word in the parentheses to complete the following
sentences(2m).
1, The readers ..............want to borrow books must have library cards.
( whom, who, which, when )
2, My father used to ...................me to the circus when we lived in the city.
( take, taking, takes, took )
3, The clowns made us ....................excited ( feel, feeling, felt, fall )
4, I hope you .....................with us next summer holiday.
( come, came, will come, comes)
III/ Finish the second sentence so that it has the same meaning as the first (2m)
1, Miss Green keeps our school library.
- Our school
library.........................................................................................................
2, The air is not fresh.
- I
wish..........................................................................................................................
..
3, She felt sleepy because of the long performance.
- The long
performance...................................................................................................
4, Yesterday I read five books. Several of them were good.
-
Yesterday.................................................................................................................
.....
5, They want to play football in the morning.
- They
enjoy....................................................................................................................
6, They have just repaired the window which they broke yesterday.


Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 59
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- The
window..................................................................................................................
IV/ Find the word that it has the same meaningas the word given.(2m)
1, Place: countryside, spot, friend, sands.
2, Combine: finish, start, join, enjoy.
3,Join in: combine, take part in, perform, take.
4, Various: same, pure, really, differient.
The end.

Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 26
Unit five: Work and play.
A/ In class. (A2)
I/ Objects.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to read for
comprehension to ask and answer questions about Ba.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: repair, appliance, fix, gutar, art club, artist.
2, Structures: What does he learn to do in elecctronics?
He learn how to repair household appliances.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a tape and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up - Ask the student to go to the Go to the board and answer
board and give questions: the teacher’s questions.
What does Mai study in
Physics?
What do you study in
Geography? Look at two pictures and tell:
What is your favorite subject? He is learning how to repair a
- Have the students look at socket board in picture one,
and he is playing the guitar in
two
the picture two.
pictures and introduce about
2, Read a passage and find the
them:
Presentation main idea of the passage.
This is Ba , tell me what he is
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 60
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
doing.
Read the passage with a
Now you read a passage about partner. Then read it aloud.
Ba and tell me what the main
idea of the passage is.
Have the students read the
passage Go around to help
the sts .Then ask them to read Use the questions to work in
it aloud to the class. pairs.
Listen and correct their Give the own answers.
mistakes if they have.
Have them work in pairs( use Compare with own answers
the questions about Ba) and correct.
Call some good students in
order to practice in front of the
class.
Listen and give the keys:
a. Ba likes Electronics best.
b. Yes, he does. He enjoys
school very much.
c. He learns to repair
household appliances. Read again the text.
d. He will be able to fix his own
appliances.
e. Yes, he is. His drawings are Read these vocabulary.
very good
Call some students and ask
them to read again the text to
check those answers. Rewrite these sentences into
Give the vocabulary: enjoy, notebooks.
Electronics, household
appliances, fix= repair, to be
good at, artists.
• What does he learn to do in Work in pairs.
4, Production Electronics? He learns how
household Ask the teacher’s questions.
to repair
Then practice in front of the
appliances.
• How does this subject help class.
Ba? He will able to fix his
Talk about own free time
own appliances.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 61
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Have the sts work in pairs, ask
and answer about yourself,
Make the questions for them.


Listen and correct their
5, Homework mistakes. Rewrite them into notebooks.
Can ask the sts to talk more
about their free time.
Note the main structures that
you have just learnt.
- I learn how to draw in the
art.
- I’m good at playing the
guitar.
Learn by heart the words and
structures that they’ve learnt.
Write the passage : what you
usually do in free time.

V/ Draw experience:




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 27
Unit five: Work and play.
A/ In class ( A3+ A4)
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to read and ask, answer
the questions about a math problem, listen to find informations.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: right, cost, know, price, problem, zero, eraze.
2, Structures: How much does one banana cost?
- 600 dong ( It costs 600 dong )
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 62
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a tape and a cassete- player.
IV/ Teaching procedures.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Have a student tell what he/ Answer the teacher’s question
she does in his/ her free time.
Make some questions:
-What is your favorite
subject?
-Do you like Math?
-Is it easy or difficult?
- Is it interesting? Listen to the teacher
Now you will listen to a
conversation in which they
are solving problem. You read
and answer: How much does
2, Presentation one banana cost? Listen to the tape and read a
Play the tape. conversation while listening.
Have the students read a
conversation Give the new words.
Ask them to find the new Read these words after the
words. teacher.
Then give and explain:
-Right > < Wrong
-Price
-Cost Work in pairs.
-Erase Compare with other pair
Let the sts to work in pairs to about the answer: 600 dong.
answer this question: How
much does one banana cost?
Call one student and ask he/
she to read again the
3, Practice conversation Listen and answer the
*How much does one banana teacher’s question.
cost? 600 dong
Use the things that are in the Work with a partner.
class to ask: How much does
this pen cost?
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 63
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Have the sts make questions Guess:
and answer them. They are about subjects such
Listen and correct their as Geography, Physical
mistakes Education....
Now ask the sts to look at
these pictures in page 54 and
guess: What are the pictures
about? Listen the tape carefully.

The aim of the listening: What Match the letters with the
subjects do Ba and Lan study correct pictures.
on Saturday morning?
Play the tape, check the keys
after the first time. Read the answer in front of
Play the tape again and ask the class.
4, Presentation the sts to match the letters of Talk about it.
the subjects with the
appropriate student, in the
correct order. Ask and answer.
Ask one or two students to
give their answers in front of
the class
Let the sts to work in pairs
about the periods of their
class on that day or other
days in a week.
5, Homework Ask them make a Rewrite into notebooks.
conversation about the school
subjects that they study in the
school.
*Play the game Networks to
consolidate the lesson: write
the words that they are in the
Math.
Then ask some questions:
How much does.............cost?
Learn by heart vocabulary
and structures.
Do ex. In ex. book.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 64
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
V/ Draw experience
Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 28
Unit five: Work and play.
A/ In class (A5, A6, A7)
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to read for
comprehension to know the words about the subjects in school.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: essay, past >< present,event, around, world, language
class, graph, globe, atlas.
2, Structures: We learn about books .
She studies different contries and their people
. III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a tape and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching proceduces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Make questions for student: Listen and answer the
-How many subjects do you teacher’s questions.
study at school? -There are nine.
-What are they? -I like Math....because I know
-Which subject do you like? many numbers.
Why?
Now we read the passage to
know the subjects that the
2, Presention Vietnamese students learn. Listen to the tape and read.
Play the tape and ask the
students to read while Find the new words and read
listening. them.
Introduce the new words: Read loudly in front of the
essay, past, present, around, class.
world.
Call some students and have Answer the teacher’s question
them read the passage. -We learn about books and
Listen and correct their write essay.
mistakes. -We study past and present.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 65
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Make questions for students: -We study different countries
-What do you study in and their people.
Literature? -We learn about how things
work.
-What do you study in History? -No, We don’t.
-What do you study in
3, Practice Geography? Look at the books and listen
-What do you study in carefully to teacher’s
Physics? explaining.

-Do you learn to play soccer in
English?
Let students to look at Now
discuss with a partner, and Work in groups.
explain doing it: We have 4 Each group gives the keys
names of subjects in and others listen and give
accordance with relevant comment.
words about each subject. You Compare with teacher’s keys.
will find one irrelevant word
and odd it out.
4, Production Have students work in small Answer these questions( you
group can speak by Vietnamese )
Call groups to speak the keys.
Give the correct keys: Work with a partner
Literature- paintings.
History- basketball games.
Science- preposition. Some students match it.
English- England. Compare with the teacher.
Make questions for students:
Do you like Math? What do you
use in Math/Art/ Music... class? Write the answer on their
Now you match each subject to papers.
the correct items. Ask them to
work with a partner.
Call them to match. Read them in front of the
Give the correct keys. class.
5, Homework Can give these words: globe,
atlas, graphs, equations, Rewrite these homework.
calculator.
Give students small papers to
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 66
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
answer a question, such as:
What do you study in Math/
Geography...........?
Ask students to read their
papers.
Listen and correct.
Learn by heard the words and
structures, Speak about
favorite subjects.
Do exercises...........in book

V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 29
Unit five: Work and play.
B/ It’s time for recess. (B1,2)
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to discribe recess
activiyies.
II/ Language content.
1, Vocabulary: Recess, ring, bell,chat, blindman’s bluff, catch, marble,skip rope,
noisy, indoor.
2, Structures: Some students are playing games.
The bell rings and the students go into the yard.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepair a tape and a cassette- player.
IV/ Teaching procedures.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Make questions for students: Listen to the teacher’s
What do you study in.............? questions.
Are you good at.................? ( by students)
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 67
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
What is your favorite subject?
Do you like playing games?
Which game do you like
playing?
2, When do you usually play it? Look at these pictures and
Presentation Now you look at these pictures speak: They are playing
and speak what they are doing. games.
Can you guess, what games are
they playing? (can speak by
Vietnamese) Listen and read these words.
Introduce the new words:
Blindman’s bluff, Skip rope,
Chat, Marbles, Catch Listen to the tape and read it.
Play the tape, and ask students
to look at the book, read the
passage while listening. Read aloud in front of the
Have them read passage aloud class.
in front of the class.
Check for pronunciation and
make any necessary Answer the teacher’s question
corrections.
Use each picture to make
questions for students:
- What are these students doing
at recess?
They are playing games.
-What are they playing? Work in pairs.
3, Practice They are playing catch. One asks and other answer.
Let students to work in pairs. ( Use those pictures to ask
and answer).


Listen and correct their
mistakes. Talk about yourselves.
You knew these students are
playing these games, and you? Work with a partner.
Now you talk about yourselves.
The first teacher makes
questions and students answer
them. Then students ask each Use these questions to
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 68
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
other. practice with a partner.
Listen to students and help
them practicing.
*What do you usually do at
recess? Listen to the aim of the
4, Production Do you usually talk with your listening, and listen to the
friends? tape.
What do you usually do after Compare the keys with a
school? What is your favorite partner, and give it in frond of
game? the class.
For the listening, teacher
speaks the aim of it, and then
play the tape. Play this game.
(Can ask students to read these
words.) Go to board and write.
*Mai is playing catch.
Kien is playing blindman’s bluff.
Lan is skipping rope.
5, Homework. Ba is playing marbles. Listen and write.
Guide the game: Find some
who to check students.
After that, use the pictures to
ask students to write the games
that are under the pictures.
Learn by heart all the new
words.
Talk about yourself by asking
this question: What do you
usually do at recess?

V/ Draw experience.
Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 30
Unit five: Work and play.
B/ It’s time for resess. (B3+ B4 + B5)
I/ Objects.
By the end of the lesson. The students will be able to speak about activites
of students in America and compare with Vietnamese schools.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 69
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: energetic, portable, earphone, shooting some hoops,
penpel, junior high school, score goals, take part in, swap
2, Structures: What do students do at recess?
- The energetic students often play baskeball.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a tape and a cassette- player.
IV/ Teacing procedures.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up. Makes questions for Students listen to teacher and
students: answer teacher’s questions.
-What do you usually do at -I usually skipping rope.
recess? -Yes, I do/ No, I don’t.
-Do you play skipping -I like playing catch.
rope...?
-What do you like/ dislike -They usually play marble.........
doing? at recess.
-What do Vietnamese -No/ Yes
students often do at recess?
-Do you know what students
2, in the USA often do at Open the books and look at it.
Presentation recess?
In order to know exactly
what American students Answer the teacher’s questions.
usually do at recess, now ( can answer by Vietnamese)
let’s read part 3 (page 57)
Have students look at the Read after teacher these new
picture and answer the words.
questions: -What is he
doing?
He is scoring goals. That is
called “ Shooting some Listen to the tape.
hoops”
-What are they
doing Read silently and can write
They are listening to music. these words.
They have an earphone.
Play the tape for students.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 70
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Have students listen to it and Read in front of the class.
read silently while listening.
Go around the class and
help students by giving Work in pairs.
some new words: pen pal,
take part in, energetic, Give answers
portable.
Have students read the text
in front of the class and
correct their mistakes if they Read full answers.
have.
Then ask them to work in Talk about activities of students
3, Practice pairs about the part in USA and in Vietnam usually
Questions. play at recess.
Listen to students’ keys and ( need talk full sentences)
give correct answers:
a. C c. D
b. A d. D
Ask students to read full Listen to teacher and do this
answers. exercise.
Have students work with Speak loudly in front of the
partner. class.
USA
Vietnam Listen to teacher and answer
4, Production Basketball Play questions.
games
Listen to music ( marble,
catch
Swap
cards .................... Play this game.
Eat and talk Eat and
talk
Give the papers to students
and explain doing this
exercise.
After that, ask students to
speak Rewrite into the books.
5, Homework The main activities of your
class.
Make questions for students: Read the tex again and answer
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 71
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
3, Practice -What do you usually do at the questions.
recess?
-Do you like playing............?
-What do the students in Listen and correct the mistakes.
Vietnam/ in USA do at
recess?
Then ask students to play
this game. Explain playing Read loudly in front of the class.
it: You must write the games
that you have just known in
Vietnam and in USA. Two
groups, if the group writes
more and faster, the group Work with a partner .
will win.
Write 5 sentences about Read these sentencs.
activities of sts in USA and
VN
Now you work individually, Use the pictures that are in unit
4, Production read the text again and five to practice.
answer the questions in your
book. Work in pairs.
Have them compare with a
partner, then read the
answers.
Give the correct answers:
-She is doing her Math
homework. Practice in front of the class.
-They are going to get a cold
drink in the cafeteria.
5, Homework -He’s in the music room.
-He’s learning to the tape.
-He usually meets his
friends.
-She likes playing volleyball.
Ask them to work in pairs by
making questions and
answer.
Explain this: Let’s invite him.
Why don’t you
come along?
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 72
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Use the pictures of unit five
to practice by making the
questions:
- What do you usually do
after school?
-What sports do you like
playing?
-Should you work too much?
Have students work with a
partner about after school
activities.
Learn by heart vocabulary.
Write 5 sentences about you
by answering this question:
What do you usually do after
school?
Rewrite a conversation into
the notebooks.

V/ Draw experience




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 31
Unit six: After school.
A/ What do you do? ( A1)
I/ Objects.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to talk about after school
activities.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: relax, invite, together, maybe.
2, Structures: You sould relax.
I usually meet my friends.
He practices it every day after school.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 73
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- Prepare some pictures, a tape and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching procedures.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Make questions for students: Listen to teacher and answer
What do you usually do at teacher’s questions.( by
recess students)
-What do you usually do after
school? Look at these pictures and
Now you look at these answer this question( by
pictures and answer the Vietnamese)
questions:
2, -What are they doing in each
Presentation picture?
They are playing voleyball.
They are doing homework. Read these words
They are meeting friends.
Introduce these words: play
voleyball, do homework, meet Listen to the tape.
friends.
Now you will hear a
conversation between Minh
ans Hoa. They are talking Read a conversation.
about their after school
activities.
Play the tape and ask Work in pairs and read it.
students to read it while
listening.
Have students work with a
partner. Then call some pairs
and ask them to read the text
loundly in frond of the class.
Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 32
Unit six After school.
A/ What do you do (A2)
I/ Objectives.


Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 74
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to practice asking and
answering questions about after school activities using adverbs of frequently.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: Adverbs of frequently: always, often, usually, sometimes,
seldom, never, How often?
2, Structures: How often do you study in the library after school?
-I always study in the library after school.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan
- Prepare pictures of after school activities.
IV/ Teaching procedures.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students activities
1, Warm up. Make questions for students to Go to board and answer the
check old lesson and introduce teacher’s questions.
the new lesson: -What does
Minh do after school? -What
does Hoa do after school?
-What sports does she like
2, playing? Look at those pictures and do
Presentation Now you look at these pictures teacher’s requests.
and answer the questions for _They are studying in the
each picture: What are they library.
doing? -They sometimes study.
Where are they?
When do you often Show each picture to ask and
study? answer the questions.
Do you often play it?
For the first picture has done for
the students, ask them to work
in pairs by making questions Read these adverbs.
and answering
Listen to students and correct
their mistakes if they have.
Introduce adverbs of Make sentences.
frequently( read and write ):
always, often, usually,
sometimes, seldom, never. Work in pairs.
Make a sentence for the first
picture
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 75
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
They always study in the library.
3, Practice. Have students replace “ always” By the students.
by other adverbs.
Make questions: How often do
they study in the library?
Ask students to work in pairs. Practice in front of the class.
*Now talk about you:
What do you usually do after
school? Read and write.
How often do you ........after I always stay with my uncle at
school? weekends.
Have students use other Mai never goes swimming.
activities to practice: go to the My brother usually watches
movie, visit one’s grandparents, TV.
do housework... How often do you stay with
4, Production. *Make new sentences: your uncle?
-I/ always/ stay/ uncle/ After that they practice with a
weekends/. partner.
-Mai/ never/ go swimming/.
-My brother/ usually/ watch TV/ Listen to teacher.
evening/.
Make a survey.
Ask students to make questions
for the underline words.
Listen and correct their Practice with a partner.
mistakes.
Rewrite into the notebooks.
5, Homework @ Use the structure that you
have learn to make a survey.
Write 5 sentences about you to
answer the question: What do
you usually do after school?
Other student uses the friend’s
survey to speak: I and my friend
usually read the books after
school.
Learn by heart.
Talk about you.
Do exercise 3( 28- sbt )
Prepare the next lesson.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 76
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh

V/ Draw experience




Preparatory date
Teaching date
Period 33
Unit six: After school.
A/ What do you do? (A3 + A4 +A5)
I/ Objectivies.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to read for
comprehension to answer the questions and listen for specific information.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: Pastime, rehease, school anniversary celebration, president
of the stamp collector’s club, sporty, lie.
2, Structures: Use the present simple tense.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare pictures of Nga, Nam and Hoa’s activities.
IV/ Teaching produres.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Make questions for students: Answer theses questions.
-Do you like playing soccer? ( By students)
-How often do you play it?
-What do you usually do after
school?
There are many activities to do
after school. Do you know? Can guess.
2, Now you read the passage that Look at the book .
Presentation is in the book and answer the
question: What does each
student do after school?
Ask students to look at these Listen and answer the
pictures and answer the teacher’s questions.( Can
questions” answer by Vietnamese).
-What is Nga doing? She is Listen and repeat the words

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 77
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
rehearsing a play for the that were given by the teacher.
school anniversary celebration.
Explain these words: rehearse,
play, anniversary, celebration.
-What is Ba doing? He is
seeing the stamps. He is the Answer and write.
president of the stamp
collector’s club.
Guide reading these words:
stamp, president, collector,
club.
-What is Nam doing? He is
lieing on the couch and Read all the words.
watching TV. He is not very
sporty. Listen to the tape and repeat it.
Explain the word: lie, sporty.
Guide all the words. Read in front of the class.
Ask students to look at the
books and listen to the tape,
then repeat Answer these questions.
Call some students to read.
Correct their mistakes if they Note these new words.
have
And help them to find other
new words, and explain them.
Make questions for students:
-What does Nga like doing
after school hours? She likes
acting.
-What do Ba and his friends
often do on Wednesday
afternoons? Read the text again.
3, Practice They get together and talk Work in pairs by asking and
about their stamps. answering the questions.
-What does Nam do after
school hours? He often Practice in front of the class.
watches videos, reads a library
book or comics, or lies on the
couch in front of the TV.
Ask students to read again the Listen to teacher.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 78
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
reading. Then let them to work
in pairs by answering the
questions that are in the book.
Call some groups to practice in
front of the class.( Can play a Listen to the tape.
game noughts and crosses for
each group).
You’ve just know what Ba,
Nam and Nga do after school
hours. What about other Go to the board and match.
students, exactly Mai, Nam,
Ba, Lan and Kien? What do
they do after school? Now you
listen to the tape and match Answer these questions.
each name to an activity.
Ask students look at the book
and repeat these words that
are in the books.( Can ask Work in pairs.
them to guess) Talk about you by asking these
4, Production Play the tape twice and call a questions.
student to match.
Pay the tape again to check.
Then make a question for each
student: What does Mai do
after school hours? She goes
to school cafeteria. Ask the other friend.
Have them work in pairs.
@Now talk about you. Play this game.
-What do you do after school
hours?
-How often do you do that?
5, Homework. -When do you do it? Rewrite these exercises into
-What activities do you like your notebooks.
best?
Show the student who has just
told and ask: What does he/
she do after school hours? Etc.
Use some pictures to match
and talk: who and what does
he/ she do after school hours?
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 79
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
*Learn by heart the new words.
Read again the reading and
write the answers into your
notebooks.
Write 5 sentences about you.

V/ Draw experience




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 34
Unit six: After school.
B/ Let’s go! ( B1)
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use the structures for
making, accepting, and refusing invitations.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: assignment, relax.
2, Structures: What about going to the movies?
Let’s go to my house!
Why don’t you relax?
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make aplan.
- Prepare some pictures of after school activities.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @Now you remind the old Remind the old lesson and
lesson and answer the answer the teacher’s
questions: questions.
What does Nga do after She rehearses a play.
school? Yes, he does.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 80
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Does Ba like collecting the No, he isn’t.
stamps He usually goes home and
Is Nam very sporty? watches TV.
2, What does Nam do after ( By the students)
Presentation school? Listen and look at the picture
that is in pages 64.
What about you?
@ You have just talk about
some after school activities. Guess: They are listening to
Today we continue talking music.
about other activities, now you
look at this picture and you -There are four: Ba, Nam, Hoa
guess what they are doing? and Lan.
Introduce the new lesson by
making questions: How many Listen to the tape.
students are there in this
picture? Who are they?
Tomorrow is Sunday. They are
talking about what they should
do in this evening. Now listen
to the tape and answer that Practice in front of the class.
question.
Play the tape twice and ask
them to repeat it. Listen and write.
Call four students to read .
Explain the new words: to be
on, relax, assignment.
-What about + V-ing...?
-Why don’t you + V.......?
3, Practice -Let’s +V..... Invitations.
Accepting: Great or Oh, I’d Work in pairs.
love to.
Refusing: I’m sorry.
Ask them to work in pairs by Practice in front of the class.
answering the questions that
are in the book.
Go around the class to help Write into the notebooks.
students
Then have them practice in
front of the class.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 81
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Listen and give the key. Listen to carefully.
-Nam wants to go to the
movies.
-Because there aren’t any
4, Production good movies at the moment. Play this game.
-Lan wants to listen to music at
her home.
-Because she has so many Stick these small papers so
assignments. that they are correct
-It’s Saturday. sentences.
@ Use the pictures of four
students and small papers to
stick on the board:
Nam : doesn’t want to go to Answer this question
movie
Ba :doen’t want go to Lan’s
house Make invitations
Hoa: wants to listen to music
5, Homework Lan: wants to go to the movies
Now you answer the question:
What does Nam/ Ba/ Hoa/ Lan
want to do? Listen to and rewrite them into
Now you make invitations with your notebooks.
a partner, using : -Let’s........
-What
about........
-Why don’t
you.....
@ Write questions into
notebooks.
Imagine you won’t have any
lessons tomorrow. You make
some invitations with your
friends to relax.

V/ Draw experience.




Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 82
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh



Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 35.

Unit six: After school.
B/ Let’s go!

I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to read for
comprehension and discuss after- school activities in America.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: teenager, attent, youth, organization, scout, guide, musical
instrument, coin, model, plane,
2, Structures: What do American teenages like doing in their free time?
-They like attending youth organizations such as scouts and guides .
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare the pictures of American teenagers’ activities.
IV/ Teaching procedures.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up. @Make questions for Answer this question( can use
students: What do you usually these words: play soccer,
do after school? ( you can watch TV, collect stamps, talk,
speak 5 activities). skip- rope.....)
Now you can talk about
organizations of Vietnamese By Vietnamese.
teenagers.
Introduce words: organization,
teenager, youth.
2, @ Ask students look at these Look at these pictures.
Presentation pictures in pages 65 and talk
about them: they are the most
popular after- school activities
in America. Can you guess And guess.
what these activities are.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 83
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- eat and drink. Look at these pictures and talk
- Watch TV. about them.
- Learn to play the guitar.
- Collect stamps or coins
Read again these sentences.
- Go shopping.
- Attend youth organizations.
Have them read these words.
Find other words that you don’t
Let students read the reading.
know.
Explain the words:
-Scout also boy scout.
-Guide also girl scout.
-Coins.
Ask students to read the
Read the reading.
reading in front of the class.
Listen to them and correct
their mistakes.
3, Practice. @ Have students answer this
question:
Work in small groups.
What do American teenagers
like doing after- school?
Ask them to work in small
Practice in front of the class.
groups. Then let them to
answer their answers.
Teacher can give an example:
They like eating in fast food
Work in groups and answer the
restaurants.
4, Production question:
Listen and correct their
( watch TV, listen to music, go
mistakes.
to the movies, help old people,
@Have students work in
collect stamps)
groups and ask them answer
It is Vietnamese youth
the question: -Which of the
teenager.
activities in the list for
America teenagers do you
think are also popular among
Vietnamese teenagers?
-What organizations
Make a survey for four
are there for teenagers in
students. Write on the papers.
Vietnam?
Speak loudly in front of the
Listen to students and correct
class.
their mistakes if they have.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 84
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Give students some small Compare with other groups
papers and ask them take a and give the ideas
survey in a groups of four. Rewite into the notebooks.
5, Homework. Go around the class and help
them to do this exercise.
Then ask students to speak
loudly in front of the class
Learn by heart the new words
Write sentences about the
most popular American and
Vietnamese teenagers do in
their free time.

V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teachng date:
Period 36.
Unit six:After school.
B/ Let’s go! ( B3+ B4+ B5 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to make invitations and
refuse, accept invitations, study students’ activities in America.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: wedding, join,elderly people, community service, even,
paint, concern, neighhood.
2, Structures: Would you like to..............?
Yes, I’d love to.
It’s my pleasure
You are well come.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan
-Prepare a tape and a cassette-player.
IV/ Teaching procedures.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 85
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
1, Warm up @Talk about American Go to board and talk about
teenagers’ activities that they America steenagers’ activities
like.
Make questions for students:
- What is your date of birth? (By students)
- Do you usually hold your
birthday?
- Do you invite your friends?
- In which occasions do you
use invitations?
They can speak by
- How do you except or
Vietnamese.
refuse the invitations?
Through those questions
teacher introduce the new
2, Listen and repeat.
lesson.
Presentation @ Play the tape for each
passage.
Ask students repeat it .
-Would you like to come to my
house for lunch.( Invitation)
-Yes, I’d love to.(Except).
-I’d love to but I’m sorry I can’t.
Work in pairs.
(refuse).
Practice in front of the class.
Ask students to work on pairs.
Ese the other invitations to
Then have them practice in
make the conversations.
front of the class.
Give other invitations: Why
don’t you.............? or What
Talk in front of the class.
about ........?
Have students make invitations
in other occasions.
Then call some pairs to make
Answer the questions.
invitations.
Listen and correct their
Listen and repeat these new
mistakes if they have.
words.
What do the students usually
do in Summers in Vietnam?
They usually do volunteer
works.
Read the pasage.
Do you know what kinds of
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 86
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
volunteer works do American
children often do to help
community?
Now you read this passage
and you know what they do. Write these words.
Play the tape, and ask
students to read it .
Go around the class to help
students and explain the new Read loudly.
words: Elderly people,
community service,
neighborhood clean- up Work in small groups by
3, Practice. campaigns. answering two questions.
Have students read it loudly in
front of the class and correct
their mistakes if they have.
@ Ask students discuss in
small groups about volunteer
works of American teenagers
and Vietnamese teenagers by
asking the questions : - How
do some teenagers help the Practicein front of the class.
community?
- How do
Vietnamese teenagers help the
community? Play the games.
4, Production. Go around class and help
them. Do these exercises.
Then call some groups and ask
they speak in front of the class.
Other groups and teacher
listen to and give ideas.
@ Teacher uses small papers
5, Homework. to consolidate the lesson. Rewrite these exercises into
Give exercises for students: the notebooks.
- Make some invitations for
your friends.
- Give some community
services
in Vietnam and America.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 87
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
@ Learn by heart.
Do exercises in the exercise
book.
Note speaking invitations and
exceptings, refusing

V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 37.
After school.
Unit six:
Language focus 2.
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to do exercisex exactly
and speak English fluently by using the words and structures that they had
already learnt.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: Repeat all of them.
2, Structures:
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare some pictures of exercises.
IV/ Teaching produres.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students activities.
1, Warm up @ Make quetions for Listen and answer these
students: questions:
What are you studying at the - We are studying English.
moment? - There are ten.
How many subjects do you
have? What are they? - It starts at7,30.
What time does this class - Yes, we do.
2, start? Look at the picture and answer
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 88
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Presentation Do you usually learn new the questions.
words
@ Ask students open the - She is doing her homework.
books and look at it and - He is reading newspaper.
answer the questions: - They are kicking the ball.
What is Lan doing?
What is Mr Thanh doing? Repeat the using of the present
What are her brothers progressive tense.
doing?
-Introduce the new word:
kick and ask students to Read in front of the class.
complete the passage by Compare with the teacher’s
using the present answers.
progressive tense: S +is/
am/ are+ V.ing Work with a partner and then
-Correct their mistakes and speak in front of the class.
give the keys: doing. Is
writing, is reading, is
cooking, are playing, is Answer this question: use all the
kicking, running. ways of the time.
*Have students look at the
picturesand speak using this Work in a small group.
that, these and those. Listen Write them into the notebooks.
and correct.
*Ask students to talk about
time by asking the question: Answer.
What time is it? -I have English..........
Now look at the pictures and
complete these sentences. -No, I never play the guitar.
Note to speak and write the
correct time. -I always play the marble.
*Make questions for
students: What subjects do Name all subjects and talk about
3, Practice you have at school today? these pictures.
Do you often play the guitar Then write them on the board.
in your music class?
How often do you play Practice in front of the class.
marble at recess?
@ Talk about the subjects
that you learn at school.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 89
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Ask students to look at the Talk again using these adverbs.
pictures and answer a
question: What subjects are
they learning?
-They are learning Physical Speak the sentences about B,
Education/ Chemistry....... and hen write on the board.
Talk about the adverbs of
frequence: always, usually,
often, sometimes, seldom,
4, Production never Play the game.
Now you write sentences
about Ba. The first, can ask Make a conversation with a
them to speak and then partner.
write. Answer the questions.
Correct their mistakes if they
have.
@ Use the game to find the
subjects you learn at school. Do the exercises.
Then ask students to make a
conversation by using the
structures you learnt.
Ex. How many subjects do
you learn? What subjects do
you like best? Do you always
learn it? Etc Rewrite into notebook.
5, Homework. *Give some exercises for
students;
-She always (catch).......bus.
-Now
they(play)...........soccer.
-Let’s (go).............swimming.
-Would you
like(come)...........
movie.
Do again these exercises
into notebooks.
Learn by heart the subjects
you learn at school.
Prepare for the test.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 90
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh

V/ Draw experience.




Full name:.............................
Class 7
English test (45’)
§iÓm Lêi phª cña c« gi¸o




I/ Put the corect tense of the verbs in blanks to complete the following sentences(
3m)
1- She learns how ( use ).....................a computer in her Computer Science
class.
2- My sister (be)............... a doctor because she always (take).......................care
of sick people.
3- Would you like (come)........................my house.
4- She ( watch)........................TV tonight.
5- The students( study)................................English now.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 91
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
II/ Make questions for the following answers.(2m)
1- We have English, Math, Literature and History on Thursday.
- What...........................................................................................................
2- She usually has lunch at home.
- How often...........................................................................................................
3- My favorite subject is Physics.
- What....................................................................................................................
..
4- They always play soccer in the evening.
-
When........................................................................................................................
....
III/ Choose the best option to complete the following sentences.(2m)
1, We go to school six days.........................( a week, in a week, on a week, at a
week)
2, Students never have time to play the whole game because recess
is.......................
( short, long, energetic, lesson)
3, I enjoy.........................volleyball. ( play, to play, playing, plays).
4, History is ..................interesting and important subject. (a, an, the, at)
IV/Answer the questions about you.
1, What time do you get
up?...........................................................................................
2, How often do you go to
school?.................................................................................
3, What is your favorite
subject?.....................................................................................
4, Are you goog at
English?...........................................................................................
V/ Correct the mistake in the following sentences (1m)
1, People are living longer so there are more elder people.
.................................................................................................................................
........
2, Some young people work at hospital volunteers.
.................................................................................................................................
........
The end

Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 92
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Period 39
Unit seven: The world of work.
A/ A students’ work. (A1)
I/ Objectives.
Bu the end of the lesson, the students will be able to speak about a
student’s work and vacations.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: to be late for....., that takes about.........., vacation, summer
vacation= summer holiday, last.
2, Structures: present simple tense, simple future tense and comparative of
adjectives.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare some pictures of the summer vacation’s students.
IV/ Teaching produres.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @Make some questions for Listen and answer the
students:- What time do your questions:
classes start and finish? ( by students )
-Do you like a summer Yes, I do.
vacation? In June.
-When will you have a
summer vacation?
Now you listen a
conversation between Hoa Look at the picture and answer
and her uncle. the teacher’s questions:
Show the picture and ask They are in the kitchen and
questions: Where are they? they are eating breakfast.
2, What are they doing? Listen to the tape.
Presentations
@Play the tape and ask Read the dialogue white
students listen to it carefully. listening.
Play it again and have Work in pairs.
students read the dialoge. Role- play the dialogue in front
Have students work in pairs. of the class.
Ask the pairs to role- play
the dialoge and severe the
roles.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 93
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Have one or two pairs role-
play in front of the class. Rewrite the meaning of the
Listen and correct their new words.
mistakes if they have. Read these new words.
Explain the meaning of the
new words: to be late Look at the questions and read
for........, that takes them.
3, Practice about......, vacation, summer Work in pairs.
vacation, last.
@Ask students to look at
these questions and read Ask the questions in front of
them. the class.
Then have them work with a
parner. Tell the students that
the answers are in the unit Rewrite the correct answers
dialoge. into the notebooks.
Have some pairs practice in
front of the class.
Listen and correct their
mistakes if they have.
*Hoa does her homework 2
hours a day. Answer about yourself.
*That takes about 2 hours
4, Production. each day. ( by students ).
*Hoa will visit her parents on
the their farm during her
vacation.
@Make questions for
students:
-What time do your classes Others listen and talk about
start yourself.
-Do your classes start earlier
or later? Work with a partner.
-For how many hours a day
do you do your homework?
Do you work fewer than
Hoa?
-When will you have a Rewrite these homework into
vacation? notebooks.
5, Homework -What will you do during the
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 94
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
vacation?
Then ask students to work
with a partner, and have
them role- play it.
Listen and correct their
mistakes.
@Learn by heart .
Rewrite all the answers into
notebooks.
Prepare next lesson.
V/ Draw experience.



Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 40.
The world of work.
Unit seven:
A/ Students’ work. ( A2+ A3 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to read for
comprehension throught a letter and practice listening.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: Easter, Christmas, Thanksgiving, celebrate.
2, Structures: Present simple tense and comparative of adjectives.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a letter in Viet Nam and some pictures of public holiday.
IV/ Teaching procedures.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @Make questions for students: Listen to and answer the
-What do usually do during teacher’s questions.
vacation?
-If you don’t visit your uncle,
what you will do?
-Will you write a letter?
Use the letter to introduce the Look at books and tell about a
lesson. letter.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 95
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Ask students to look at it, this
is a letter from American and it
is a letter from Viet Nam.
2, @Ask students to answer the Look at this letter and answer
Presentation questions: -Who wrote this the questions:
letter? -Tim wrote this letter.
-Who did he write -He wrote this letter to Hoa.
this letter? -In your opinion, ( Students can guess )
what is the letter about? Read this letter.
Now you read this letter and
answer this question.
Have students read the letter,
and go around the class to
help the students. Read these new words and
Give the meaning of these write them.
words:
-hear, find, celebrate, Easter,
Thanksgiving, Christmas, like
doing. Practice in front of the class.
Call some students to read the
letter. Teacher listen and Work in pairs.
3, Practice. corrects their mistakes if they
have.
@Have the students work in Practice these questions in
pairs by asking and answering front of the class.
these questions.
Ask them to practice in front of Write the correct answers into
the class. notebooks.
Give the correct answers:
-Summer vacation is the
longest in America.
-During his vacation, Tim
spends time with his family. Talk again these vacations.
-Vietnamese students have
fewer vacations than American
students. Guess: which vacation is in
*Can you name American each picture.
vacations that you have just
learnt. Listen to tape and write the
Now you look at these pictures name of the public holiday in
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 96
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
and talk about them.( you can each picture.
answer the question: Which
vacation is in the first picture?) Give the answers.
Play the tape and ask students
to write the name of the public
holiday in each of these Listen to teacher.
pictures.
Play the tape again.
Ask students to give their
answers.
Then give the correct answers: Work in small groups
4, Production a. Thanksgiving.
b. Independence Day. Answer the teacher’s
c. New Year’s Eva ( Day ). questions.
d. Christmas.
Talk some sentences about
these public vacations.
@Now you talk about the
vacations in Viet Nam. Go to the board and write all
Teacher can make some sentences that you wrote.
questions:
-How many vacations are there Correct the mistakes.
in Viet Nam?
-What are they? Rewrite exercises into
5, Homework. -What do you usually do on notebooks
each vacation?
Ask students to work in pairs,
then write on the papers.
Call some students to read.
Listen and correct.
@ Learn by heart the new
words.
Name vacations in Viet Nam
and in America.
Answer the questions:
-What do American students
often do in that day?
-What do Vietnamese students
often do on that day?

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 97
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 41.
Unit seven :The world of work.
A/ A student’s work ( A4 )
I/ Objectives
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to practice reading for
comprehension.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: take a look= have a look, typical, keen, review, definitely.
2, Structures: The present simple tense, fewer/ more .....than....
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape and a picture about Hoa.
IV/ Teaching procedures.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @Call a student and ask Go to the board and answer the
him/ her to talk about the questions.
public holidays in Viet Nam
and in American.
In the public holidays, you
usually haven’t classes.
What do you usually do I usually go to school.
everyday? Yes, it is.
Is your work at school hard? I study four hours a day.
How many hours a day do
you Yes, I do.
study?
Do you have to do a lot of

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 98
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
homework?
Now we read this text and
2, we know that students work Look at this picture and answer:
Presentation hard or don’t work hard. Hoa is studying/ doing her
@Ask students to look at homework.
this picture and answer the
questions: What is Hoa
doing? Listen and read these words
She is studying/ doing her
homework.
At home she always review Read the text.
lesson. She is a keen
student so she is definitely If the teacher plays the tape you
not lazy. will listen it carefully.
Now you read the text and Read loudly in front of the class.
find the main meaning of it.
Can play the tape and ask Read and write these words.
them to listen.
Call students to read in front Answer these questions:
of the class. ( can work with a partner ).
Give the words: Take a look,
Have a look, typical, period.
Make questions for students.
-What do many people
think? Read the text again.
3, Practice -How many hours a week
does Hoa work?
-Is Hoa a keen student? Work in pairs.
-Does Hoa study hard?
@Ask students to read again Practice in front of the class.
the text, have them look at
the questions and work in
pairs . Rewrite these correct answers.
Go around the class and
help them to answer the
questions.
Call some pairs to practice in
front of the class.
Give the correct answers:
a. People think students
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 99
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
have an easy life because
they only work a few hours a
day and have along
vacations.
b.Hoa works 20 hours a Work with a partner about
4, Production. week. It is fewer than most yourself by asking these
workers’ work. questions.
c.( student’s answer )
d. No, the writer doesn’t
think students are lazy.
Have students read again Others listen and compare with
the text. own answers.
@Make questions about
students: How many hours a
day do you study at school/ Practice in front of the class.
at home? -Do you work
hard?
-Are you a good
student? Why or Why not?
-Do your parents Read the part Remember.
think of you?
-Is that more or Make sentences as the same as
fewer hours Hoa? these sentences.
Ask students to work with a
partner, then have them
practice in front of the class.
Listen and correct their
mistakes if they have.
*Ask students to read the
part: Remember and note Rewrite exercises into notebooks
5, Homework. these structures: -You will be
late for school -I’m
usually early.
-We only work a
few hours a day.
- This is fewer
hours than any workers.
-This is more
than some workers.
@ Learn by heart.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 100
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Rewrite the Remember.
Read again the text and
answer again the questions
into your notebooks.

V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 42.
Unit seven: The world of work.
B/ The worker. ( B1 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to speak daily works.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: part- time, homeless, mechanic, prefer, shift, day off.
2, Structures: He has fewer days off than my Mom.
She takes care of thefamily.
He repairs machines in the factory.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a photo of Tom’s family.
IV/ Teaching produres.

Stages Teacher’s activties Students’ activites
1, Warm up @Call two students to talk Talk about own studying.
about their studying.
Use the picture to introduce Look at books and answer the
the new lesson by making teacher’s questions.
questions:
-What is this?
-Whose letter is this?
-Who does Tom write about in
2, the letter?
Presentation. @Please read this letter and
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 101
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
you will know who Tom write Read the letter.
about
Play the tape and ask the Listen to the tape.
students listen to it carfully.
Ask them to read after the Read the letter while listening.
tape. Scan this letter.
Then have them scan it.
Go around the class and help
them if they need. Read in front of the class.
Call some studens to read the
letter in front of the class.
Listen to them and correct
their mistakes if they have. Find the new words and read
Explain new words: Take care them.
of, part- time, homeless,
mechanic, prefer, shilt, day Answer the questions:
off.
Ask the students to read the - His mother is a housewife.
letter and answer the - He repairs machines in a
questions: factory.
What is his mother’s job? - He plays golf.
What does his Dad do in a
factory? - They often go to Florida.
What does he do in his free
time?
Where do they often go on
3, Practice. vacation?
Call students to answer these Look at the questions and work
questions . Listen to them and in pairs.
corect their mistakes.
@ Have students look at the Practice in front of the class.
questions that are in the
pages 77, and ask them to Write the correct answers.
work in pairs
Ask them to practice. ( Can compare with own
Listen and correct their answers )
mistakes and give the correct
answers.
-She works at home but three
morning a week she works
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 102
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
part- time at a local
supermarket.
-She cooks lunch for
homeless people once a
week.
-He is a machanic. He repairs
4, Practice. machines in a factory.
-He works about 40 hours a Do an exercise.
week. First you can work with a
-The John family always goes partner.
to Florida on vacation. They
have a great time there.
Then ask them to compare Then you speak the sentences
with sentences that you that you have just done.
guessed.
@ Have students use these Write them on the board.
words to make new
5, Homework. sentences: Rewrite into notebooks.
-My Mom/ take care/ family.
-cook/ homeless poeple/ once
a week/.
-My Dad/ machanic/ repair/ a
factory/
-golf/ free time/.
-go to florida/ vacation.
Ask them to speak and write
these sentences.
@ Learn by heart.
Read again this letter.
Use the words over to write
Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 43.
Unit seven: The world of work.
B/ The worker. (B 2 + B3)
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to read comprehension
and then compare some information .
II/ Language contents.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 103
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
1, Vocabulary: feed, buffalo, pig, collect the eggs, grow rice, crop, real,
buffalo shed, chicken coop.
2, Structures: He works more hours than Tim’s father.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a picture, a tape and a casette player.
IV/ Teaching produres.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @Make questions for students: Listen and answer:
-What is Mr Jonh’s job? -He is a mechanic.
-Where does he work? -He works in a factory.
-How many hours a week does -He usually works 40 hours a
he usually work? week.
-How many day off a week does -He has two days off a week.
he have?
-Does he have a three - week -Yes, he has a three week
summer vacation? summer vacation.
You have just known some Listen to teacher.
information about Tim’s father.
Do you know about Hoa’s
father?
Now you read the text to know
2, some information about him. Look at the picture and
Presentation @Ask students to look at the answer teacher’s questions:
picture and answer the He is a farmer. He works in
question. the fields.
This is Hoa’s father. What does
he do? Where does he work? Listen to teacher and read it.
What is this? This is a buffalo.
Read the text and guide
students to read.

Ask them to read the text. Go
around the class and help them Practice in front of the class.
to read.
Call some students to read the
text. Read and write the new
Listen to students and correct words.
their mistakes.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 104
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Give the new words: feed, Answer the questions:
buffalo, pig, egg, collect, grow, -He is a farmer.
rice, buffalo shed, chicken coop. -He works 84 hours per week.
Make questions for students:
-What does Mr Tuan do? He gets one day off, four or
-How many hours a week does five times a year.
he work? -Yes, he does.
-How many days off does he
3, Practice. have? Read again the text is in the
-Does he work more hours than page 76 and answer the
Tim’s father? questions about Mr John
@ Ask students look at the part Then they write on the table
b1 and answer again the that they drawn into the
questions about Tim’s father. notebooks.
( Or look at the answers that Talk about them in front of the
they answered). class.
Ask them to compare with them.
-Mr John works about 40 hours
per week. He gets two days of
every week. He also has a three
week summer vacation. Answer two questions and
-Mr Tuan works 84 hours per note these answers.
week. He gets one day off, four
or five times a year. He has no
real vacation.
*Who works more hours?
-Mr Tuan works more hours Work with a partner
4, Production. than Mr John Talk about two jobs.
*Who works less hours?
-Mr John works less hours than
Mr Tuan. Listen and write into
@ Have students talk about two notebooks.
5, Homework. jobs: mechanic and farmer.
Call some students to practice
in front of the class.
Listen and correct their
mistakes.
@ Rewrite two jobs into
notebooks and learn by heart.
Do exercise 3 ( pages 46)
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 105
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh

V/ Draw experience

Preparatory date:
Teching date:
Period 44.
Unit seven: The world of work.
B/ The worker. ( B4+ B5 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to listen for coprehension
and fill out into the form.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: hours per week, amout of vacation, be on duty, assistant,
annual 2, Structures: Sometimes he works in the morning and sometimes he
works in the afternoon.
When he has less time, he goes to the city.
Tim’s father has fewer days off than his father.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a tape and a cassette- player.
IV/ Procedures .

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up. @ You talk about Tim’s father’s Go to board and talk about
job and Hoa’s father’s job. their jobs.
Make some questions for
students ( By students )
-What is your father’s job?
-How many hours a week
does he work?
2, -What’s about his vacation?
Presentation. @ Now you listen to the tape
and take notes. Listen to the teacher about the
Explain the aim of this aim of the listening.
listening: It talks about some
people and their jobs, you
listen and take notes into this Put the box into the notebooks
form.
Label a form on the board, Repeat these works.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 106
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
then guide the meaning of new
words: Listen to the tape
-hours per week.
-amount of vacation. Each student talks the
Play the tape once. sentences that he/ she has just
Play it twice. heard.
Call some students talk about Others compare with their
each person and ask him or friends.
her fill out into the form that is Listen again and check into the
on the board. notebooks.
Ask students to compare with
their friends.
Then play the tape three
time( stop each sentence and
check it)
Give the correct sentences:

Name Job Hours per
Amount of
week
vacation
3, Practice four Speak loudly in frond of the
Peter doctor 70
class, using the examples.
weeks
Susan nurse 50 three
weeks
Jane shop 35 one
week
Rewrite them into the books.
assistant
Phong factory 48 two
weeks
Worker

@Use the form over to make Each student talks about a job.
4, Production
sentences. ( Using the main meaning of
Ex: Peter works more hours each job)
than Susan.
Susan works fewer hours
than Peter.
Ask students to make
sentences as the same as
those.
Listen and correct their
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 107
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
mistakes if they have. By students. ( I’m going to be a
@ Have students talk about doctor).
the following jobs: Listen.
- Mechanic.
5, Homework. - Farmer.
Listen and write them into the
- Worker.
notebooks.
- Teacher.
- Nurse.
- Shop assistant.
( Using the structures in form
over to speak )
Can ask them this question:
What are you going to do in the
future?
Then play the tape in part “
Play with words”
@ Rewrite all the jobs that you
have just spoken into the
notebooks.
Prepare the next lesson: Unit
eight.

V/ Draw experiences.
Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 45.
Unit eight: Places.
A/ Asking the way. ( A1+ A2 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to ask and show the
way.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: on the right, on the left, go straight a heard, opposite....
2, Structures: Could you tell me how to get there?
Could you show me the way to the supermarket, please?
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape and a casette- player.
IV/ Teaching procedures.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 108
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @Call on one student to go to A student goes to the board
the board and talk about one’s and talk about one’s job.
job that you have just learnt in
unit seven.
Ask students to look at the Look at the pictures and
pictures in the book and name name them.
2, them.
Presentation. @ Listen and give the correct
names: Read again these places.
a. National Bank of Vietnam.
b. Saint Paul Hospital.
c. Hotel. Then write them on the
d. The Central Post office. books.
e. Hanoi Railway station.
f. Dong Xuan Market.
Guide the students to read. Tell some places where you
Ask students: Are there any live.
similar places in our town?
Name these places.
Help them to name some
places that are in the town. Look at the picture that is in
*Now you look at the picture the pages 80 and answer the
that is in the pages 80 and questions.
answer the questions: Who are Read and write the new
they? words.
They are Nga and a
tourist
Where are they?
They are on the street. Listen the conversation
What does the tourist between Nga and a tourist.
want? Do you know?
You’ll hear a conversation
between Nga and a tourist.
You listen and answer that Repeat the tape.
question.
Play the tape, ask students to
repeat the dialogue.
Have students role- play the Practice in front of the class.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 109
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
dialogue.
Listen and help the students to Ask this question.
read correctly.
Ask students to practice in
front of the class.
Tell students to ask over
question:
What does the tourist want?
- He wants to go to the Practice these sentences.
souvenir shop.
- He wants to go to the
supermarket.
*He used these sentences to
Practice in front of the class.
ask the way:
3, Practice. - Could you tell me how to get
to the souvenir?
- Could you tell me the way to
the supermarket, please?
Use the places that are in the
@ Ask students to role- play
part one to practice:
Nga and foreigner.( Have
-Could you tell me the way to
students use the structures
National Bank of Vietnam?
that are in the dialogue)
-Go straight ahead. Take the
Listen and correct their
4, Production. first street on the right.
mistakes.
National Bank of Vietnam is in
Then ask them to replace the
front of you.
words (the souvenir, the
supermarket) by other places
Listen and rewrite the
( use
5, Homework. homework.
the places that are in the part
A1)
@ Draw some street maps on
the board and ask students to
make the dialogue about
asking the way.
Guide students to ask and
answer.
Listen and correct.
@ Learn by heart.
Make again the dialogue .
Do exercises 1,2 ( pages
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 110
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
-sbt)




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 46.
Unit eight: Places.
A/ Asking the way. ( A3 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to ask for and give
directions to some places.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: Review some places.
2, Structures: Ask the way and give directions.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape and a cassette player, a street map that is in the book.
IV/ Teaching procedures.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Call on two students to go - P1: Could you show me the
to the board and they ask and way...?
give directions to some places. - P2: Go straight ahead......
Ask for students: Name some Ex: school, hospital, factory,
places that you live near them. market, hotel......etc.
Now I have a map where I live,
and you read places that you
2, can. Look at the map and read
Presentation @ Put the map on the board those places.
and ask students to read.
Give the meaning of the words:
- bakery: cöa hµng b¸nh
- toy store: cöa hµng ®å ch«i Then write them into your
- drugstore: cöa hµng thuèc notebooks.
- bank: ng©n hµng
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 111
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- shoe store: cöa hµng giµy
dÐp
- police station: ®ån c¶nh s¸t
- museum: b¶o tµng
Listen to the teacher carefully.
- stadium: s©n vËn ®éng
Have them practice these
words.
Read loudly this example.
Explain asking and giving
directions:
*Where is the bank?
The bank is between the hotel
Practice it again.
and the restaurant. It’s
opposite the hospital.
Use those words to make the
Or: Take the second street on
3, Practice. dialogue.
the right. The bank is
............hospital.
Practice in front of the class by
@ Tell students to make the
rolling- play.
dialogue as much as over one,
use these words: police
station, shoe store, bookstore,
restaurant, hotel, post office
Look at the map again and
and school.
4, Production listen to the teacher.
Ask them to role-play.
Listen to students and correct
their mistakes if they have.
Answer this question.
@ Ask them to look at the map
again and ask: If I go straight
Listen to the tape and give the
ahead to the second street,
names of places you heard.
turn right. What is on the left
next to the restaurant? The
bank.
You will hear similar directions.
Listen the tape and write
names of shops, offices you
Repeat the sentences you
hear following the directions in
have just heard.
the tape.
Play the tape 2 or 3 times.
Call on some students to read
the names. And then give the
correct answers:
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 112
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
a. souvenir.
b. shoe store. Rewrite into the notebooks.
5, Homework. c. Hotel.
d. Drug store.
e. Hospital.
If the class has time, students
will
repeat the sentences in the
tape.
@ Use the map in the book
and rewrite asking and giving
directions into your
notebook( Use the words given
in the book)
Read more times them.

V/ Draw experience.

Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period: 47.
Unit eight: Places.
A/ Asking the way. ( A4+ A5 ).
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to ask and answer about
the distance between two places.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: coach, distance, have a guess.
2, Structures: How far is from( name of place ) to( name of place )?
It is ....................
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching procedures.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Use the street map in part 3 to Look at the map and make the
check old lesson. dialogue.
Call two students and ask them
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 113
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
to ask and gve directions to
those places.
If you want to know the
distance between two places,
which question you’ll make?
2, @ Now you listen the Listen to the tape.
Presatation. conversation between Hoa and
Lan.
Play the tape, and ask Repeat the conversation.
students to repeat.
Have them role- play the Practice the dialogue.
dialogue.
Ask them to review asking the
distance between two places. Rewrite this quetion and
- How far is it from Hue to Ho answer.
Chi Minh City?
- I think it’s about 1, 030 km.
Ask them to practice that
3, Practice Look at the map and practice
structure
with a partner.
@ Label the Vietnamese map
on the board.
Have students ask and answer
question with a partner.
Practice in front of the class.
* How far is it from Hanoi to
Vinh
- It’s about 913 km.
Call on some pairs to practice
Look at again the street map in
in front of the class.
4, Production. Listen part 3 and make the dialogue
and correct their
as the example.
mistakes if they have.
@ Use the street map in part 3
to make the dialogue.
( By replacing the underlined
- Could you tell me the way to
words )
the supermarket ?
- Go straight ahead, take the
first street on the right . It is
in front of you.
- How far is it from here to the
Practice in front of the class.
supermarket ?
- It’s about 500 meters.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 114
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Ask them to practice in front of
the class.
Listen and correct their
5, Homework. mistakes. Rewrite the duties into your
Have students read and write notebooks.
the part : remember.
@ Learn by heat the structures
in unit 8.
Rewrite the questions and
ansers in part 5 into your
notebooks.
Do exercises: 2 ( in pages 48 )

V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teching date:
Period 48.
Places.
Unit eight:
B/ At the post office( B1)

I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to ask for information at
the post office and practice in inquiring about prices.
II/ Language contents.
1,Vocabulary: send, envolope, altogether, cost,change, mail, pay, receive.
2, Structures: How much does/ do .........pay it/ altogether?
- It costs/ they cost............
How much chance does/ do................receive?
- 1,000 dong.
I’d like to send this letter to the USA.
III/ Teaching aids.
- make a plan.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 115
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- Prapare a book, a tape and a cassette plaeyer.
IV/ Teaching procedures.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up. @ Make questions for Listen and answer the
students: questions:
- Do you usually write the - Yes, I do.
letters - The post office.
- Where do you go to send - About............
them - Yes, I do.
- How far is it from your - About........
house to the post office?
2, - Do you often buy stamps Look at he picture and answer
Presetation. and envelopes? the question.
- How much are they?
@ Now you look at this picture
in the pages 83 and make Can by Vietnamese.
questions for students: What
do people usually do at the
post office? Read after the teacher.
If students don’t answer by
English, you can speak by
Vietnamese. And write them.
Teacher helps them: sending
letter/ postcard, sending/
receiving parcel, making long/ Listen to the tape and repeat.
short distance phone calls,
buying stamps/ envelopes.
Ask them to repeat these Role play the dialogue.
words.
Play the tape and ask the
students Listen to the teacher
to listen the conversation explaining.
between Liz and Clerk to know
what they are talking about.
Have them role play the
dialogue.
Listen and correct their Read these sentences.
mistakes if they have.
Explain the structures: Listen the tape again and
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 116
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- I’d like to send this letter to answer the questions.
the USA.
- I’d like some envelopes.
3, Practice. - How much is/ are+ S?
Practice in front of the class.
How much does/ do+ S+
cost?
-It’s+ price.
-It costs/ Theycost+ price.
Play the tape again and ask
Work with a partner.
students to repeat.
@ Then have them answer the
questions in the book.
Answering the questions.
Listen and correct their
mistakes.
Give the correct answers:
- Liz’ll mail the letter to USA.
- She pays 11,500 dong
altogether.
Work in small groups.
- She receives 3,500dong in
change.
Ask students to work with a
partner by asking and
answering the questions about
Make a new dialogue by
you.
basing on the conversation in
- Do you usually go to the
4, Production. part one.
post office?
- Where is your nearest post
office?
Practice in front of the class.
- How do you get there from
your home?
- How much do your stamps
and envelopes cost?
Go around the class to help
Note these structures and read
students.
them.
@ Have students work with a
partner by basing on the
conversation in part 1, you
Rewrite the duties into the
make up a similar
notebooks.
conversation.
The first the teacher can role-
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 117
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
play a clerk and a student – a
5, Homework. clerk. Then students make the
dialogue.
Go around the class and help
students to make sentences.
Ask them to practice in front of
the class.
Note the main structures:
- I’d like to +V.......?
- How much do/
does..........cost?
It cost/ They cost........
@ Learn by heat the words
and the structures.
Read the dialogue more time.
Do ex.1,2 ( in pages 50 )

V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 49.
Unit eight: Places.
B/ At the post office. ( B2 ).
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to read for
comprehension and answer the questions.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: local stamps, overseas mail, regularly, phone card.
2, Structures: I’d like some stamps for overseas mail.
I need to buy a phone card.
I need a phone card.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 118
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- Prepare a book, a tape, a cassette player and a picture.
IV/ Teaching procedures.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Call two students and ask them Two students go the board and
to make the dialogue at the make the dialogue.
post office.
Now you look at the picture Look at the picture and answer
and answer the questions: the questions;
Where do Hoa and Nga go - to the post office.
after school?
What do they want from the - They want some stamps.
post office? Do you know?
Ask the students to guess.
( they can speak by
Vietnamese )
If you want to know, you’ll
listen to the conversation
2, between Nga and Hoa.
Presentation. @ Play the tape. Listen to the tape and repeat.
Ask students to repeat the Practice in front of the class.
tape.
Call on some students to
practice in front of the class. Repeat these words.
Listen and correct their
mistakes. Rewrite them into the
Give some words that students notebooks.
didn’t know:
- local stamps.
- stamps for overseas. Role -play the tape.
- A phone card.
Play the tape again and have
Listen to the teacher and
students role- play it in front of
answer the teacher’s
the class again.
questions.
Make questions for students:
- What does Hoa need from
the post office?
- Why does she need stamps
Others listen to their answers
for overseas?
and give comments.
- How often does she write
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 119
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
the letters?
- Why does she need a
phone card?
- Does she phone her parents
Compare with over guessing.
one a week?
3, Practice. Ask students to compare with
Make questions and answers
their guessing
in front of the class.
@ Ask students to ask and
answer the questions in front of
the class.
If they have time, they’ll write
Listen and correct their
these answers into the
mistakes if they have.
notebooks.
Give the correct answers:
- Hoa needs some local
stamps, some stamps for
overseas and a phone card.
- Because she has a pen pal
in America.
- She writes the letters very
regularly- about once a
month.
4, Production. - Because she phones her Talk about you.
parents once a week.
The first answer the teacher’s
- Yes, she does.
questions
@ Ask students to talk about
them.
The first teacher can make
Use these words to make the
questions for them , then the
dialogue.
students make questions and
answer them.
Teacher can give some words
that they are used at the post
office.
Practice with a partner.
- envelops, writing pads,
postcards.
5, Homework. Ask students to use these
Rewrite your duty into your
words to make the dialogue.
notebooks.
Listen and correct their
mistakes if they have.
@ Make the dialogue again.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 120
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Answer the questions about
you:
- What do you do from the
post office?
- Why do you need them?
- How often do you go to the
post office?

V/ Draw experience




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 50.
Unit eight: Places.
B/ At the post office.( B3, B4, B5 ).
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to speak about the price
of some things and practice listening for comprehension.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: Review the words that are used at the post office.
2, Structures: I’d like...........
How much is a letter to America?
It’s 9,500 dong.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a cassette- player and a tape.
IV/ Teaching procedures.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Ask students to make a Make a dialogue and answer the
dialogue again, and ask some teacher’s queston.
questions about Hoa and about
the students.
Now you look at the picture, Look at the picture and answer
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 121
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Hoa goes to the post office the question.
again. What does she talk to a
clerk? Do you know?
Now you hear a conversation Listen to the tape.
between Hoa and a post office
clerk but there is some
unfinished information. You
read and complete the
2,Presentati conversation. Read the words in the box.
on @ Ask students to read the
words given in the box and the Listen the tape again.
dialogue.
Play the tape first. Read the dialogue that you have
Play the tape twice. completed.
Ask students to read the Or practice in frontof the class.
dialogue that you have just
completed. Listen the tape again and
Can ask them to practice in correct the mistakes.
pairs the dialogue.
Play the tape again and correct Use the words in the box and
their mistakes: like, are, much, make the other dialogue.
is, change.
Have students use the words Practice in front of the class.
that are in the box to make
other conversation. Look at the picture.
3, Practice. Teacher gives an example: I’d
like some postcards and
writing pads? Speak the name of these things.
@ Ask them look at the picture
in the pages 85 and answer
the questions: What are they?
These are the things which Mrs
Robinson will buy. Now you Listen to the tape to answer the
listen and say the cost of each teacher’s questions.
item as well as the total cost of
the things. Compare with a parner.
Play the tape twice and ask
them to answer the questions:
_ What is the total cost?
_ How much change will Mrs.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 122
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Robinson have from 60,000 Answer the questions in front of
dong? the class.
( Ask students to listen the
price of each item, then they Rewrite the correct answers.
must add up total).
4, Give the correct answer: Answer the questions.
Production. - The total cost is
59,000dong. Work with a partner.
- She will have 1,000dong.
Ask them to listen again.
Correct the mistakes.
@ Explain the part 5.
Read the questions and ask
Read the part: Remember.
students to answer them.
Have them work with a partner.
Ask students first, then ask
them to practice in front of the
class.
Listen and correct their
mistakes.
• Have students read the part: Listen and rewrite them into
books.
Remember:
5, _ I need some envelopes.
Homework _ I need to buy a phone card.
_ I’d like some stamps for
overseas.
_ I’d like to sed this letter to
America.
@ Learn by heart.
Review all the lessons.
Do exercises:

V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 123
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Period 51, 52.
Consolidate for the first term.
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will review all the main words,
structures and grammar that the students learnt from unit one to unit one.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary:
2, Structures:
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book and some exercises.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Make questions about
students:
- How are you? Listen and answer the teacher’s
- Where do you study? questions.
- How often do you go to
school?
- How do you usually go to
school?.....etc.
Do these exercises.
Today we review the
2 Practice knowledge that we learnt from
unit one to unit eight.
- to sent
@ Ex.1: Write correct tense of
verbs in parentheses.
- are learning
- She needs (send) this letter
to America.
- takes
- The students in class
7a(learn) English now.
- goes
- The doctor (take) care of
sick people.
- will visit
- My mother usually (go) to
work by motorbike.
- We (visit) our grandmother
this summer vacation.
- How often does she play
Ex. 2: Make questions for
badminton?
underlined words.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 124
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- She plays badminton twice - What do tourists visit in Hue?
a week. - When will they buy new
- Tourists visit the citadel in shoes?
Hue. - How long does it take you to
- They will buy new shoes do your homework?
next Sunday. - What time do your classes
- It takes me two hours to do start?
my homework.
- Our classes start at 7 - How/ do the farmer work?
o’clock. - How many/ hours a week do
Ex.3: Make questions with Vietnamese students work?
the words given. - Why/ isn’t she definitely?
- The farmers work very hard. - Where/ do they always go on
- Vietnamese students work vacation?
25 hours a week.
- She isn’t definitely because
she works about 45 hours a - thinner
week. - tallest
- They always go to Ha Long
Bay on vacation - less
Ex.4: Write correct
adjectives in the blanks. - most important
- Hoa is (thin) than Mai.
- Who is the (tall) person in
your family? - good
- My father has (little) days of
than my mother.
- Easter and Christmas are
the (important) vacations of Nam is the/ tallest student in my
American students. class.
- She is a (good) student in What/ an interesting movie!
Where/ do you live?
my class.
When/ is your birthday?
Ex.5: Rewrite the following
It’s fifteen past one.
sentences:
- No one in our class is taller
than Nam.
- How interesting movie is!
- What is your address?
- What is your date of birth?
- at
- It’s one fifteen.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 125
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Ex.6: Put one correct word
into the blank to complete - send
the following sentences.
- I live with my family..........34 - What
Ly Thuong Kiet Street. - Works
- I’d like to.........this letter to
USA.
- ...........terrible weather! Read the text carefully.
- She.........at supermarket.
*Ex.7: Read carefully, and then
answer te questions. Practice in front of the class.
Mr. Tuan and his wife, Mrs
Hoa, live in Ha Tay. They both
work in Ha noi.Mrs Hoa works
in a hotel and Mr Tuan drives a
taxi. They both enjoytheir jobs, Work with a partner.
because they meet a lot of
different people. They live in a
nice house, but they want to
move.We like our jobs.Mrs Hoa Answer the questions:
says, but we have to travel in
Ha noi every day. It takes a - They live in Ha Tay.
long time and it cost a lot of
money. Mrs Hoa wants to buy - She works in a hotel.
a house in Ha Noi, but houses - He is a taxi driver.
cost a lot too. - Because they meet a lot of
a. Where do Mr Tuan and Mrs different people.
Hoa live? - Because they have to treval
b. Where Does Mrs Hoa work? into Ha noi every day.
c. What does Mr Tuan do?
d. Why do they enjoy their
jobs?
e. Why do they want to move - at.
to Hanoi?
- Which
• Ex.8:Choose the correct
words to complete the - Lots
following sentences:
a. My parents are.......work - From
now. ( in, with, at, on )
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 126
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
b. ...........are there in your
room? - on
( which, what, who, how )
c. Hoa has...........of friends in
Hue.( many, any, lots, some - cheaper
)
d. Hw is your new house
different .......your old
house? ( with, about, to,
from )
e. His uncle works.......his
farm.
( at, on, in, from )
f. Which of these two houses
are.......( cheap, cheaper,
cheapest, the cheapest).
Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 55
Unit nine: At home and away.
A/ A holiday in Nha Trang. ( A1 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to tell the activities that
happened in the past and talk about a vacation.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: was, were, had, did, took, bought, wasn’t, gift, trip, tired
2, Structures: The past simple tense with irregular verbs.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape and a cassette- player, and some pictures of Nha
Trang.
IV/ Teaching procedures.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Make questions for Listen to the teacher and
students: answer the teacher’s questions.
- What do you always do in ( by students )
summer vacation?
- Do you like traveling?
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 127
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- Do you know which place is
it?
- What you do when you visit Listen
Nha Trang?
Now we are going to listen to a
conversation between Ba and
Liz. They are talking about
2,Presentati Listen and repeat the dialogue.
Liz’s vacation in Nha Trang.
on You listen and tell me what
Work with a partner.
they did there
@Play the tape twice and ask
Practice in front of class.
students to repeat it.
Have students work with a
partner
Read after the teacher.
Call on some pairs and ask
them to practice in front of the
class.
Listen and write.
Listen and correct their
mistakes if they have.
Talk about the dialogue: all
activities that Liz tells about
happened in the past:
a. How was your vacation in
Practice in front of the class.
N.T?
- It was wonderful. I had a lot
of fun.
b. What did you think of N.T?
Talk about Liz.
- It was beautiful. The people
were
friendly, but most things
weren’t cheap.
c. What places did you visit?
Ask and answer these questions
- My parents took me to see
again in front of the class.
Cham Temples and Tri
Nguyen Aquarium.
d. Did you buy any souvenirs?
- Yes, I did. I bought a lot of
different gifts for friends in
Read again the dialogue.
America.
f. Were you tired after the
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 128
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
3, Practice. trip?
- No, I wasn’t. Arrange these sentences with a
Ask the students to ask and partner.
answer each other.
Listen to them carefully and
correct their mistakes. Speak in front of the class.
@ Have the students read
again the dialogue.
Then ask them to arrange
those sentences into order with
a partner
Call on students to read in front
of the class. Then give the Listen, read after the teacher
keys. and write them into the
- Liz went to Nha Trang. notebooks.
- Liz visited Tri Nguen
Aquarium.
- Liz bought souvenirs.
- Liz returned to Ha Noi.
- Liz talked to Ba about her
4, Answer the questions about Liz:
vacation.
Production. Explain about:
- Liz went to Nha Trang on
go- went do- did
vacation.
Buy- bought visit- visited
- Her parents went to the
Take- took talk- talked
Aquarium with Liz
Have- had return-
- She bought a lot of different
returned
gifts for her friends.
Be- was/ were
- No, she wasn’t.
Ask them to read after teacher.
@ Have students read the
Practice in small groups.
reading again and then answer
the questions about Liz.
- Where did Liz go on
Talk in front of the class.
vacation?
- Who went to the aquarium
with Liz?
- What did she buy in N.T?
- Was she tired after the trip?
5, Listen and rewrite into your
Listen and correct the
Homework notebooks.
mistakes.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 129
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
*Ask the students talk about
you by asking some questions:
-Where did you go last
vacation?
-What did you think of it?
-What places did you visit?
-What did you buy?
-Were you happy after the trip?
@ Read the dialogue many
times
Learn by heart the verbs in the
past tense.
Talk about Liz and you in past
vacation.

V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 56.
Unit nine: At home and away.
A/ A holiday in Nha Trang. ( A2 )

I/ Objectivies.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use the past tense
and read comprehension.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: shark, dolphin, turtle, crap, type of fish, cap, poster, saw,
thought, wore, ate.
2, Structures: The simple past tense.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a cassette player and a tape and some pictures of animals in
the sea.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 130
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
IV/ Teaching produres.
1, Warm up @ Put the correct verbs in the Go to board and do this
blanks ( went, bought wasn’t, had )
Liz............to Tri Nguyen with her
parents. She.........a lot of
souvenirs for her friends in
America.She...........
tired after the trip.
She....................a great time. Guess by Vietnamese or by
(bought, was’t. had, went) English: What did Liz andher
You knew that Liz and her family family do dring the visit to Tri
visited Tri Nguyen aquarium. Can Nguen Aquarium?
you guess what Liz and her
2, family did during the visit to Tri Listen to the tape and read
Presentation Nguyen? it.
Call on some students to guess
(they can guess by Vietnamese) Read loudly in fron of the
@Play the tape and ask students class.
to listen and read while listening
the tape. Read after the teacher these
Go around the class and help words.
them.
Call on some students to read Work with a partner.
the text in front of the class.
Listen and correct their mistakes.
Note the words that they don’t Practice the text by asking
know: and answeing the questions.
- shark, dolphin, turtle, crab,
cap
- see( saw), wear( wore ), Listen and repeat
eat( ate )
Ask them to work with a partner
by asking the questions in the
Answer again these
book.
questions.
Call on some pairs to read loudly
in front of the class.
Listen and give the correct
answers.
Read the text again.
- Her parents went to the
3, Practice aquarium with her.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 131
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- They saw sharks, dolphins,
turtles and many different
types of fish. Look at the pictures and tell
- They bought a cap and a the story of Liz’s trip.
poster.
Work in small groups
- Yes, she did. Liz wore the cap
Speak about each picture
all day.
- Yes, they ate fish and crab.
- Because she rememberedthe
beautiful fish in the aquarium.
@ Have students read again the
text then make and answer again
Speak again these
questuions.
sentences. If you have time
Listen and correst their mistakes.
you can rewrite these
Now you look at these pictures
sentences into your
and tell the story of Liz’s trip to
notebooks.
Tri Nguyen Aquarium.
Ask them to do in small groups,
then call on students to speak
each picture
Listen and give the correct
sentences
- The Robinson family went to
4, Production Use the answers to tell again
the aquarium.
the story of Liz’s trip.
- They saw sharks, dolphins,
turtles and many colorful fish.
Review the past tense by
- There was a souvenir shop
answer these questions:
near the exit of the aquarium.
- They went to aquarium.
- Mr Robinson bought Liz a cap
- Yes, they did.
with a picture of a dolphin on
- He bought a cap for Liz.
it. Mrs Robinson bought a
- Because she
poster.
remembered the beutiful
- After their visit to the
fish in the aquarium.
aquarium, the Roinsons went
*Repeat these verbs and
to a food stall.
write them into the
Mr. And Mrs. Robinson ate fish
notebooks.
and crab and Liz ate noodles.
@ Have students read again the
5, Homwork Rewrite the duty into your
text and tell about the trip of Liz’s
notebooks.
family to Aquarium in Nha Trang.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 132
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Then make some questions for
the text to review the past tense:
- Where did they go?
- Did they see sharks,
dolphins.....?
- What did Mr. Robinson buy for
Compare with owner
Liz?
answers.
- Why did Liz eat noodles for
Speak in front of the class.
lunch?
After that the teacher notes the
verbs in the past:* see- saw, eat-
ate,think- thought, wear- wore,
look- looked, buy- bought, be-
was/ were,go- went
@ Read more time the text and
Listen the tape again and
tell again.
check.
Learn by heart all the verbs in the
past.
Do ex. 1,2( pages 53- S.B.T )

Read and write these words.


-b. The Robinsons returned to Ha
Noi by bus.
Read again and answer the
-d. This was the first time Liz saw
3, Practice. questions:
the paddies.
-e. They stopped at restaurant for
- By bus.
a short time.
- No, she wasn’t.
-h. Mrs Robinson bought some
- They stopped at the
food for Liz.
restaurant and Mrs.
-j. They arrived home in the
Robinson bought some
evening.
food for Liz.
Play the tape the four times and
- At about 7 p.m
stop it in each sentence to check
the key and explain the new
4, Production words: Work with a partner.
- Unfortunately: thËt kh«ng may
- rice paddy: c¸nh ®ång Practice in front of the class
- peaceful: yªn b×nh
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 133
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- roadside restaurant: nhµ hµng
ven ®êng
5, Homework - peanuts: l¹c Listen and rewrite the duty
@ Ask students to read the into the notebooks
sentences which they hear. And
answer questions :
-How did they returned to Ha
Noi?
-Was the second time Liz saw
the paddies?
-What did they do on the way
back to Ha Noi?
-What time did they arrived
home?
Call some pairs to practice .
@ Talk about you by answering
the questions:
-How did you go to school
yesterday
-What time did you come back
home
-Did you watch T.V?
-What did you do after school?
@ Tell about Liz’s trip.
Learn by heart all the verbs in the
past.
Write 5 sentences what you did
yes.




Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 134
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
1, Warm up @ Put the correct verbs in the Go to board and do this
blanks ( went, bought wasn’t, had )
Liz............to Tri Nguyen with her
parents. She.........a lot of
souvenirs for her friends in
America.She...........
tired after the trip.
She....................a great time. Guess by Vietnamese or by
(bought, was’t. had, went) English: What did Liz andher
You knew that Liz and her family family do dring the visit to Tri
visited Tri Nguyen aquarium. Can Nguen Aquarium?
you guess what Liz and her
2, family did during the visit to Tri Listen to the tape and read
Presentation Nguyen? it.
Call on some students to guess
(they can guess by Vietnamese) Read loudly in fron of the
@Play the tape and ask students class.
to listen and read while listening
the tape. Read after the teacher these
Go around the class and help words.
them.
Call on some students to read Work with a partner.
the text in front of the class.
Listen and correct their mistakes.
Note the words that they don’t Practice the text by asking
know: and answeing the questions.
- shark, dolphin, turtle, crab,
cap
- see( saw), wear( wore ), Listen and repeat
eat( ate )
Ask them to work with a partner
by asking the questions in the
Answer again these
book.
questions.
Call on some pairs to read loudly
in front of the class.
Listen and give the correct
answers.
Read the text again.
- Her parents went to the
3, Practice aquarium with her.
- They saw sharks, dolphins,
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 135
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
turtles and many different
types of fish. Look at the pictures and tell
- They bought a cap and a the story of Liz’s trip.
poster.
- Yes, she did. Liz wore the cap Work in small groups
Speak about each picture
all day.
- Yes, they ate fish and crab.
- Because she rememberedthe
beautiful fish in the aquarium.
@ Have students read again the
text then make and answer again
Speak again these
questuions.
sentences. If you have time
Listen and correst their mistakes.
you can rewrite these
Now you look at these pictures
sentences into your
and tell the story of Liz’s trip to
notebooks.
Tri Nguyen Aquarium.
Ask them to do in small groups,
then call on students to speak
each picture
Listen and give the correct
sentences
- The Robinson family went to
4, Production Use the answers to tell again
the aquarium.
the story of Liz’s trip.
- They saw sharks, dolphins,
turtles and many colorful fish.
Review the past tense by
- There was a souvenir shop
answer these questions:
near the exit of the aquarium.
- They went to aquarium.
- Mr Robinson bought Liz a cap
- Yes, they did.
with a picture of a dolphin on
- He bought a cap for Liz.
it. Mrs Robinson bought a
- Because she
poster.
remembered the beutiful
- After their visit to the
fish in the aquarium.
aquarium, the Roinsons went
*Repeat these verbs and
to a food stall.
write them into the
Mr. And Mrs. Robinson ate fish
notebooks.
and crab and Liz ate noodles.
@ Have students read again the
5, Homwork Rewrite the duty into your
text and tell about the trip of Liz’s
notebooks.
family to Aquarium in Nha Trang.
Then make some questions for
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 136
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
the text to review the past tense:
- Where did they go?
- Did they see sharks,
dolphins.....?
- What did Mr. Robinson buy for
Compare with owner
Liz?
answers.
- Why did Liz eat noodles for
Speak in front of the class.
lunch?
After that the teacher notes the
verbs in the past:* see- saw, eat-
ate,think- thought, wear- wore,
look- looked, buy- bought, be-
was/ were,go- went
@ Read more time the text and
Listen the tape again and
tell again.
check.
Learn by heart all the verbs in the
past.
Do ex. 1,2( pages 53- S.B.T )

Read and write these words.


-b. The Robinsons returned to Ha
Noi by bus.
Read again and answer the
-d. This was the first time Liz saw
3, Practice. questions:
the paddies.
-e. They stopped at restaurant for
- By bus.
a short time.
- No, she wasn’t.
-h. Mrs Robinson bought some
- They stopped at the
food for Liz.
restaurant and Mrs.
-j. They arrived home in the
Robinson bought some
evening.
food for Liz.
Play the tape the four times and
- At about 7 p.m
stop it in each sentence to check
the key and explain the new
4, Production words: Work with a partner.
- Unfortunately: thËt kh«ng may
- rice paddy: c¸nh ®ång Practice in front of the class
- peaceful: yªn b×nh
- roadside restaurant: nhµ hµng
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 137
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
ven ®êng
5, Homework - peanuts: l¹c Listen and rewrite the duty
@ Ask students to read the into the notebooks
sentences which they hear. And
answer questions :
-How did they returned to Ha
Noi?
-Was the second time Liz saw
the paddies?
-What did they do on the way
back to Ha Noi?
-What time did they arrived
home?
Call some pairs to practice .
@ Talk about you by answering
the questions:
-How did you go to school
yesterday
-What time did you come back
home
-Did you watch T.V?
-What did you do after school?
@ Tell about Liz’s trip.
Learn by heart all the verbs in the
past.
Write 5 sentences what you did
yes.




V/ Draw experience.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 138
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh


Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 57.
Unit nine: At home and away.
A/ A holiday in Nha Trang. ( A3+ A5 ).
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to hold information
through listening and tell again the story you hear.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: paddy, stop, arrive
2, Structures: The past simple tense.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @Ask the students tell about the Tell about Liz’s trip.
trip of Liz.
Play: Rub out and remember Play the game by making
Went was visited sentences with the words
Bought saw had given in the box.
Ate remember wasn’t
2, @ You know that Liz’s family
Presentation visited Nha Trang on vacation. Guess about this ( can talk by
Can you guess? -How did Vietnamese )
they return to Ha Noi? -What
did they do on the way back to
Ha Noi?
-What time did
they arrived home? Read these statements.
Now you look at A3 and read
these sentences, then you listen
to the tape and choose the
sentence in each pair which
contains the similar information Listen to the tape.
to the tape. Work with a partner.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 139
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Play the tape three times.
Go around the class and help Read owner choice.
the students.
Call on some students to read Listen to the teacher
the choice.
After that, give the correct
sentences Read Ba’s diary loudly in font
- improve of the class.
Call some students to read the
diary in front of class.
Make questions for students: Work with a partner by asking
- Where did Liz and her these questions.
parents arrive in Ha Noi
from?
- What does Mr Robinson do?
- Who taught Liz Vietnamese?
- What does Ba collect?
- Where does her aunt live?
- When will they have dinner
together?
Ask students to work with a
3, Practice. Listen to teacher.
partner and then practice in
front of the class.
@ Have them look at : Now
Work in small groups.
make these sentences true and
explain doing.
Go around class and help
Compare with teacher’s
students to do. After that, call on
answers.
some students to read loudly.
Listen and correct their
mistakes.
- Liz lived next door to Ba.
- Liz learned Vietnamese in
Vietnam.
- Ba collects stamps.
- Liz's aunt lived in New York.
4, Production Work in small groups.
- They moved to the other side
of Ha Noi.
Read the diary.
- They moved. Now Ba is sad.
@ Ask students to prepare a
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 140
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
paper and write a diary of Listen and correct.
yesterday.
Call on some students to read
5, Homework. and give them the marks. Rewrite the duty into
Or ask them to use these verbs notebooks.
to make sentences: talk, go,
arrive, teach, learn, do.....
@ Read again Ba’s diary then
write a diary of your.
Do exercise 4- pages 54.

V/ Draw experience.

Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 58.
Unit nine: At home and away.
A/ A holiday in Nha Trang ( A4 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of he lesson, the students will be able to use the past simple
tense with verbs talk, rent, move..........through the reading comprehension.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: mine, rent, keep in touch, improve.
2, Structures: past simple tense.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a tape and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @True or false: Go to board and do this
-Liz’s family went to Ha Noi on exercise.
vacation. - false.
-They saw sharks, dolphins and - True
turtles in Tri Nguyen Aquarium. - True
-Liz didn’t eat fish. - True.
-They came back home by bus. - False
-Liz saw rice paddies many - False.
times.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 141
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
-They arrived in Ha Noi at 7pm. Listen and answer the
Ask students to look at A4 and teacher’s questions.
make some questions:
-Is this a letter? No, it’s a diary.
-Do you write diary?
-What do you always write in
2,Presentati your diary? ( If student answer Read Ba’s diary.
on yes. )
@ Now you read Ba’s diary and
talk What did Ba write in his Read with a partner.
diary?
Have students read Ba’s diary.
Help students to read some new Practice in front of the class.
words:
- friend of mine.
- Rent
- The other side of Ha Noi
- Keep in touch.

Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 59.
Unit nine: At home and away.
B/ Neighbors.( B1 + B2)
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to the events that
happen in the past.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: cut, hairdresser, neighbor, material, dressmaker, make.
2, Structures: Ms. Mai bought the material and made the dress for me.
What a clever woman!
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape and a cassette player and a picture.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @Ask students to talk about the Speak in front of the class,
activities that they did last week. then write them.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 142
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Have them look at the pictures
and listen to the teacher: Hoa
and Lan are friends. They are Look at the picture and guess
talking to other. what they are talking about.
You know what they are taking
about?
Now you listen to the tape
carefully and tell me what are
2,Presentati they talking about.
on @ Play the tape. Listen to the tape and write
Ask students to the tape and sentences that you are heard
rewrite things that you heard.
Play the tape again. Speak those sentences.
Have students talk in front of the
class. Look at the dialogue and
Ask them to open the books and compare.
compare with the dialogue. Repeat the dialogue.
Listen and repeat the dialogue.
Call on some students to practice Practice in front of the class.
the dialogue in front of the class.
Listen and correct their mistakes.
Teacher explains: Read these compliments
- What a nice dress!
- What a clever woman!
- What an interesting book!
Listen and compare with
They are compliments with
How....!
What+ N Ask the students to
compare with the compliments
Repeat the new words.
with How...........!
Read again the dialogue and
Give the new words: cut,
3, Practice answer the questions.
neighbor, hairdresser, material,
dressmaker
She’s a hairdresser.
@ Have students read again the -
Yes, she did.
dialogue and then answer the -
questions: Mrs. Mai is a dressmaker.
-
- What does Hoa’s aunt do? She bought the material
-
- Did her aunt cut Hoa’s hair? and made the dress for
- What does Mrs. Mai do? Hoa.
- What did Mrs. Mai do for Hoa?
Practice with a partner by
Ask them to practice with a
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 143
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
partner by asking an answering using the Yes- No questions.
the questions
Listen and correct their mistakes.
Now you practice Yes- No
question. Talk about the neighbors by
4, The first teacher makes asking the following
Production questions questions.
- Did Hoa buy the dress?
No, she didn’t. ( by the students )
Then ask students to practice.
@ Have students talk about your
neighbors:
- Are your neighbors friendly?
- Do you sometimes help them?
Listen and write the duty into
- Do they help you?
5, the notebooks.
- What do you do for them?
Homework - What do they do for you?
Ask them to work with a partner,
then practice in front of the class.
@ Make again the dialogue.
Make 5 compliments.
Write 5 sentences about activities
that you did yesterday.

V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 60
Unt nine: At home and away.
B/ Neighbors. ( B3+ B4 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use past simple tense
to speak through the text: The neighbor.
II/Language contents.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 144
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
1, Vocabulary: sew, hobby, decide, sewing machine, cushion, try, fit.
2, Structures: Past simple tense.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching produces

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @Read a dialogue and answer the
questions, can use the Lucky Go to the board.
number. Answer the questions:
Make some questions for students: - We learn how to cook.
- What do you learn in Home - Yes, I do.
Economic - I like to cook most.
- Do you like it?
- What do you like to do most in
Home Economics?
2,Presentati Teacher introduces some words: Read the text about Hoa
on sewing, knitting, cooking......etc silently and tell the content
@ Now you read the text about Hoa of the text.
then answer some questions about
her.
Ask students to read silently and tell Mrs. Mai- Hoa’s neighbor
the content of the text. made a dress for her.
Teacher can make question for
students: Who made a dress for Read the text in front of the
Hoa? class.

Call some students to read the text
on front of the class. Read and write these
Listen and correct their mistakes by words
guiding them to read the new words
- Sew : may v¸
- sewing machine: m¸y kh©u
- cushion: gèi
- try: thö mÆc
3, Practice. Work with a partner.
- fit: võa vÆn
- hobby: sæ thÝch
Practice in front of the
@Ask them to answer the questions
class these questions and
by working with a partner.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 145
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Call some pairs to practice in front answers.
of the class. Listen and correct their
mistakes, and then give the correst
answers:
*She learn how to use a sewing Correct the mistakes and
machine write two sentences.
-She made her cushion for her
armchair first.
-It was blue and while.
-Next, she made her skirt.
-It was green with while flowers on
it.
*It looked very pretty.
-She tried it on but it didn’t fit. Work with a partner to tell
4, -Hoa’ neighbor helped her. about owner neighbor.
Production -Finally, it fitted very well.
Have them write two sentences into First answer these
their notebooks. questions and then tell
@ Ask students to tell about their about her or him.
neighbor by working with a partner.
Go around the class and help them
by making some questions: Do this exercise, after that
-What is her/ his name? read the work in front of the
-How old is she/ he? class.
-What does she/ he do?
-What is she/ he good at? Listen and correct
Then have them do exercise in part
4.
Explain doing it.
5, Call some students to read the Rewrite these duties into
Homework work. the notebooks.
Listen and give the correct answers:
watched, bought, cut, used,
decided, was, made, was, wasn’t,
helped, fitted.
@ Read more time the text about
Hoa.
Rewrite the text in part 4, and
Remember into the notebooks.
Learn by heart the part Remember.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 146
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh

V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 61
Language focus three
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use the knowlegdes
from unit six to unit nine to do the exercises, especialy the past simple tense.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary:
2, Structures: past simple tense, presenr simple tense, prepositions,
adjectives: more, less, fewer.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare further exercises.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @Make some questions for Answer the questions.
students: - Hoa watched Mrs. Mai
- What did Hoa do? make her dress.
- What did her neighbor do for - She made a dress for
2, Review Hoa? Hoa.
- What did you do last night?
@Through these answers, the
teacher reviews past simple tense: Listen to the teacher
*Uses: The past simple tense carefully and rewrite them.
expresses an action that completely
finished in the past. This tense Give some examples.
always goes with: yesterday, last
night/ week/ year, ago..... Return- returned.
*Formation: S + Ved/ V2. Buy- bought.
S + didn’t + V. Go- went
Did + S + V?

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 147
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Example:
-Mrs. Mai bought the material.
-Mrs. Mai didn’t buy the material.
-Did Mrs Mai buy the material? Answer the questions.
-What did Mrs. Mai do for Hoa?
Structures:
3, Practice - How much is it? It’s 15,000dong
- How far is it from the shoes store
to the minimart? It’s 500 meters
@ Ask students to do the exercises
*Past simple tense( in pages 97 ).
a.Have students work, and then go Work with a partner
to the board write the past simple
tense.
Buy- bought. Send- sent
Help- helped. Think- Practice in front of the
thought class.
Remember- remember.
Take- took talk- talked
b.Ask students to work with a
partner.
Call on students to do each Correct the mistakes.
sentence, then give the correct
answers: played, talked, bought,
worked, sent.
*Simple tense( in pages 98 )
Have students work with a partner
and then practice in front of the
class. Read again these
Give the correct answers: sentences.
- help my Mom/ study English
- I cleaned my room, helped my
Mom, studied English, watched
TV, played foodball and stayed
4,Presentati at Hoa’s house.
on - I will study English, clean my
- When did you decorate
room, help my Mom, see a
our classroom?
movie, visit my grandmother and
- What did Hoa try on?
buy new shoes.
*For one and two, the teacher asks - Who did he talk to about
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 148
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
students to make similar dialogues, the film on TV?
use the words given in the book. - Where did you put the
Listen and correct their mistakes cake?
@ Write the questions with Wh- - What time did you leave
questions. home for school?
5, - We decorated our classroom on
Homework Saturday evening. Rewrite the duty into the
- Hoa tried her new dress on. notebooks
- He talked to his teacher about
the film on TV.
- I put the cake on the cupboard.
- I left home for school at 6.30
yesterday.
@ Learn by heart the past simple
tense and other structures.
- Do exercises3, 4 in pages 56,
57.

- Learn by heart all the verbs and
rewrite them into the notebooks.

V/ Draw experience.

Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 62.
Unit ten: Health and hygiene.
A/ Personal hygiene. ( A1 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use the phrases and
structures to tell about personal hygiene.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: take moernig exercise, get up, eat candy, take care of
yourself, iron your own clothes.
2, Structures: Use the past simple tense and simple tense.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tapeand a casstte player.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 149
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @Call on studentsto do the
exercise: Put the verbs into past Go to the board and do this
simple tense. exercise:
- We( eat ).........a delicious - ate.
dinner at restaurant last - Taught.
Sunday. - Made.
- He( teach )..........me English
two weeks ago. Listen and and answer the
- I( make )...........a shirt for my questions:
Mom - She comes from Hue.
Do you remember about Hoa? - She lives with her aunt.
Where does she come from? - They live in Hue.
2, Where does she live now?
Presentation Who does she live with? Listen and guess.
Where do her parents live?
@ You know that Hoa lives with
her aunt in Ha Noi and her parent
live in Hue, so that they usually
write letters to Hoa. Now you read Listen to the teacher.
the letter wich Hoa’s mother sent
her. Can you guess, what her Read silently the letter
mother wrote in the letter?
Ask students to listen to teacher, Read and write these
then read silently it. words.
Guide reading the new words:
- Take morning exercises:
- Get up early:
- Take care of oneself:
- Don’t eat too much candy or Practice in front of the
stay up late. class.
Those actions are called personal
hygiene. Read again each
Call some students to read the text paraghraph and answer the
3, Pactice in front of the class. questions.
Listen and correct their mistakes.
Make questions for each
paraghraph: Work with a partner .
- Why are Hoa’s parents busy?
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 150
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- Who helps them on the farm?
- When did her aunt receive
Hoa’s letter?
Answer these questions in
*What does her Mom want her to
front of the class.
do?
*What does she want Hoa not to
do?
- When will her parents go to Ha
Correct the answers.
Noi?
Ask them to work with a partner,
then call some pairs to pracice in
Read the text again.
front of the class.
Listen and correct their mistakes.
Give them the correct answers:
Work in small groups by
- Her Mom wants her to do her
4, Production writing the actions to take
own washing and ironing
care of personal hygiene
clothes.
oneself.
- Her Mom doesn’t want her to
Talk about it in front of the
eat too much candy and stay up
class.
late.
Call spme students to read the text
Play this game.
again.
@ Ask students to work in small
groups by writing actions to take
care of personal hygiene.
Give some statements: brush
Write into the notebooks
teeth, wash clothes, have a bath,
5, Homework iron clothes
Call on each group to tell about it.
Listen and correct the mistakes.
Then teacher holds the class to
play game: Noughts and Crosses
Work receive get up
Stay up wash iron
Visit do miss
@ Rewrite the letter into
notebooks
Write 5 sentences about hygiene
oneself.
V/ Draw experience
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 151
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 63.
Unit ten: Health and hygiene.
A/ Personal hygiene. ( A2 +A4 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson. The students will be able to listen comprehention
and write the correct verb tense to complete Hoa’s letter to her Mom.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: Actions about personal hygiene.
2, Structures: Past simple and simple tense.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Have students talk about actions Talk about actions that
that Hoa’s mom wants her to do Hoa’s Mom wants her to do
and doesn’t want her to do to take and doesn’t want to do.
care of oneself.
2, @ Ask students to look at these Look at the pictures and
Presentation. pictures and work in pairs to work in pairs.
guess what Hoa did in each
picture.
Play the tape first and ask Listen to the tape and write
students to
write actions that the students
listened. Listen carefully and
Play the tape twice or three times arrange in order.
and have students arrange the Speak in front of the class.
sentences in order.
Call on some students to speak
loudly in front of the class.
Listen and correct by opening
each sentence:
- Hoa got up and took a shower. Listen each sentence and
compare with owner
- She polish her shoes and put
sentences.
them. She had her breakfast.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 152
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- She put a sandwich in her
lunch box. She went to school.
- At recess, she drank some
Correct the mistakes.
water and talked with her
friends.
- At home she changed into red
pants and a shirt, she put on
her sandals.
Talk again the actions that
- She washed and ironed her
Hoa did yesterday.
clothes
- She went to bed at 11 o’clock.
( a, e, f, d, g, c, h, b )
3, Practice After that, ask students to talk
Do this exercise.
again the actions that Hoa did
yesterday.
Give the ideas.
@ To practice the tenses of
verbs, the teacher asks students
Listen and correct the
to do the part 4 in pages 102.
mistakes.
Explain the exercise.
Have them do this.
Call on some students to read.
Answer these questions.
Listen and give the keys: was,
having, show, take, get, go, wash,
iron, eating, told, see, and go.
Guide them to read this letter.
Make questions for students:
Talk about yourself.
- What did Hoa do?
4, Production. - What didn’t Hoa do?
Ask students to ask in front of the
Play this game.
class, listen and correct.
@ Have students talk about you.
Can make questions for them:
Others write the verbs into
- What did you do yesterday?
notebooks.
- What didn’t you do yesterday?
Hold the class to play the game:
Call two students to go to board
and write the verbs that are in two
letters, and then change them
5, Homework. Listen and rewrite the duty
into the past simple tense. If the
student writes more and correctly,
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 153
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
one will win and get the good
marks.
@ Learn by heart all the verbs.
Write the letter to your friend and
talk about actions you did to take
care of personal hygiene.

V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date
Teaching date:
Period 64.
Unit ten: Health and hygiene.
A/ Personal and hygiene( A3 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to speak and write the
daily actions . Review the words and phrases about the title of personnal
hygiene.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: About the personal hygiene.
2, Structures: Review the simple tense.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Male a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @Talk about actions that you did Go to the board and
yesterday. answer the questions.
Do you remember how write the
diary?
Do you write the diary everyday?
What do you usually do everyday?
2, @ Now you look at Nam’s diary. Look at the book and read.
Presentation Ask students to read the actions
that Nam does everyday.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 154
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Ask student to ask and answer the Practice with a partner.
questions that you make yourself
Give some questions for them:
- What does Nam do at 6. 30? - gets up.
OR What time does he get up? - At 6.30
Have them work in pairs.
Call some goups to practice in Talk about that in front of
front of the class. the class.
Listen and correct their mistakes.
Then ask students to ask the
question: What does Nam do
everyday? Answer this question.
- He usually gets up at 6.30, does
morning exercises and eat
breakfast in the morning. In the
evening, he usually does his
3, Practice homwork and goes to bed at
9.30 Work with a partner.
@ Now you takl about yourself.
Let students to work in pairs
Call some groups to practice in Practice in front of the
front of the class by using the class.
questions: Write on the board.
- What do you do everyday?
- What time do you get up/ eat
breakfast........?
Then ask them to write the actions
Correct the mistakes.
that you usually do everyday into
the notebooks.
One or two students rewrite on the
4, Production. board, others with a teacher
Play this game.
correct the mistakes.
@ Hold the class to play the game:
True or false .
Write some actions on the board ,
the students will put True or False
Go to the board and do .
after each action. Then you must
make sentences with True.
Get up. Have dinner
Polish the shoes. Watch T.V
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 155
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Take a shower. Go to movies
Go to market. Do homework
Go to school. Help parents Listen and correct .
Then call two students to go to
5, Homework board and do this exercise.
Correct and give marks for them. Write the duty.
@ Rewrite the actions that you
usually do everyday.
Write the verbs in part Remember
into noteboos and learn by heart.
Do exercise into workbook.

V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 65.
Unit ten: Health and hygiene.
B. A bad toothache. ( B1 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to talk about a visit to the
dentist and can ask and answer the questions about the teeth hygiene.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: scared, hate, drill, cavity, fix, good luck.
2, Structures: Why did Hoa go to the dentist last week?
- Because......
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a picture, a tape and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1. Warm up @ Make questions for students: Listen and answer the
- What time do you get up? teacher’s questions.
- Do you brush your teeth every
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 156
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
day?
- Do you have to go to the dentist?
- Why do you have to go to the Look at the picture and
dentist answer the questions:
• Ask the students to look at the They are Minh and Hoa.
He has a toothache.
picture and answer the
questions:
- Who are they?
- What the matter with Minh? He
has a toothache, so he has to go
2, to the dentist.
Presentation Listen to the tape.
Now you listen to the tape to know
what they are talking about.
Find the words and
@ Play the tape.
phrases that you don’t
Then ask the students to repeat
know.
the tape.
Read these words.
Give the new words and phrases:
- Have an appointment: cã hÑn
Practice with a partner.
- To be scared: sî
- Drill: c¸i khoan
- Fill a cavity: hµn r¨ng
Listen to the tape again.
- Hurt: ®au
- Fix one’s tooth: cha r¨ng cho ai
Practice with a partner then
Call on some students and ask
talk in front of the class.
them to read the new words.
Ask them to practice the dialogue
Answer the questions.
with a partner, then practice it in
front of the class.
He is going to see the
Listen and correct their mistakes.
dentist at 10.30.
Make some questions for the
She saw a dentist and the
content of the dialogue:
dentist filled a cavity in her
- What is Minh going to do at 10.30
tooth.
this morning?
- What happened to Hoa last
Look at the questions and
week?
3, Practice answer with a partner.
- How did the doctor help Hoa?
Practice in front of the
After that, have students make a
class.
dialogue again.
@ Let students to practice with a
partner about the questions.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 157
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Call some pairs and ask them to Rewrite the correct answer
ask and answer the questions. into the notebooks.
Listen and correct their mistakes.
- Minh has a toothache.
- No, he doesn’t. The loudness of
4, Production the drill scares him. Do in small groups about
- Because she had a toothache. yourself by answering the
- She filled the cavity in her teeth. questions.
@ Make questions about the
students.
- Do you brush your teeth Practice in front of the
everyday? class.
- Did you have a toothache?
- What did you do when you had a
bad toothache?
- Are you scared of seeing the
5, Homework dentist? Rewrite the duty into the
- What did the dentist do with your notebooks.
bad toothache?
- Ask the students to practice with
a partner first, then call some
pairs.
Listen and give the correct
answers.
@ Read more times the dialogue.
Answer again the questions into
notebooks.
Do ex. 1,3 in page 63- 64.

V/ Draw experience.



Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 66.
Unit ten: Health and hygiene.
B/ A bad toothache.( B2+ B3 )
I/ Objectives.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 158
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to understand the lesson
by listening the tape, reading and answering the questions and then they speak
English well.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: feel, surgery, smile, fill, forget.
2, Structures: Present simple tense with WH- questions.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape and a cassette- player.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @Make some questions to check Go to the board and
old lesson. Do you often brush answer the questions.
your teeth?
Have you a bad toothache?
Are you scared of seeing
the dentist?
How does the dentist help
you?
2, Now you listen and read the Listen carefully the tape.
Presentation following paragraph to answer over
questions. Notice Dr. Lai
@ Play the tape the first time, ask
students to listen carefully, and
give some information about Dr.
Lai. Look at the box to
Before playing the second time, complete the formations
the teacher give the following box about Dr. Lai
to students listen.
Dr. Lai’s job
Dr. Lai’s clothes.
How do children feel?
Dr. Lai helps children
explains........ Listen again to check.
gives......
.... Some students talk about
tells........ information that they heard.
......
remind to
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 159
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
clean....e Listen the teacher and
at.... answer the questions.
After that , play the tape again to
check.
Call on some students and ask Work with a partner .
them to read the information they
listen. Practice in front of the
Give the correct information. class.
Make questions, in order to
students answer.
Dr. Lai is a dentist. Talk about Minh.
She wears uniform to work.
Most children feel scared when Read the text silently.
they come to see Dr. Lai.
She explains what will happen. Use the words in the text to
She gives them advice. She tells complete the story.
them how to look after their teeth
3, Practice and she reminds them to clean Read the story aloud in
their teeth regularly and eat front of the class.
sensibly.
Before listening the text, the Answer the questions.
teacher ask students to talk about
Minh.
Play the tape for students.
Have students read silently, and
then ask them to complete the Talk about yourself.
4, Production story by using the words that are in
the reading. Look at the picture and
Call on some students to read the speak.
story
Listen and correct the mistakes.
Have students read again the text,
make some questions for students
What’s the matter with Minh?
How does he feel? Rewrite the duty into the
What does Dr. Minh do? notebooks
5, Homework. What does she talk to Minh?
Why does that happy to Minh?
@ Ask students to talk about their
teeth.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 160
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Then ask students to look at the
picture of Minh and Dr.Lai and talk
about it.
Minh is nervous because he is
seeing the dentist. He has a small
cavity and Mr. Lai fills it. Minh has
a bad toothache because he
always forget to brush his teeth.
@ Learn by heart the words and
the structures.
Do again the story in the book.
Prepare the new lesson.
V/ Draw experience

Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 67.
Unit ten: Health and hygiene.
B/ A bad toothache. ( B4+ B5 + B6 ).
I/ Objectivies.
The students continue practicing about the teeth throughout information
between Minh and Dr. Lai.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: About the teeth.
2, Structures: Why.......................?
- Because......................
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape and a cassette- player.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Talk about Minh.
Make some questions about Listen and answer the
students: questions.
Have you a bad toothache?
When? Do you have to go to the
dentist?
Are you nervous? Look at the picture and talk
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 161
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Now look at the picture, and about it.
answer the questions: Who is this?
What’s the matter
2, with him?
Presentation @ Have students look at the Talk about this picture.
pictures and talk actions of them. Work in small groups.
Listen and correct their mistakes if
they have.
a. Minh’s tooth hurts. Practice in front of the
Why does he hurt? Because he class.
has a cavity.
b. Minh is very nervous. Why?
Because he’s seeing the dentist. Make the dialogue.
c. The cavity is not serious. Why?
Because it’s small.
d. Minh is very happy. Why?
Because his teeth are Ok. Practice the dialogue.
Ask the students to practice again.

3, Practice @ Have students work in small Work in small groups by
groups writing the things that you
using the following structure: need to do and don’t need
Do - brush teeth after meals. to do.
Don’t- use an old toothache.
Ask the students to talk about Listen and correct the
these pictures in front of the class. sentences
Teacher listens and corrects the Then use these sentences
mistakes. and talk again.
Use a tube of the Eat sweets.
toothbrush. Use an old
tooth Look at the other pictures
See a dentist. rush and talk about it.
Brush regularly Forget to
4, Production brush . Practice with a partner.
Teacher can give other pictures of
the teeth and ask students to
practice. Listen to the tape.
@ Talk about yourself.
What do you need to do for your Rewrite the new words.
teeth
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 162
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
What don’t you need to do for your
teeth? Listen and write the duty
5, Homework. Play the tape . into the books.
Ask the students to listen and
repeat.
Teacher give the new words:
Unhealthy food.
Neglect.
@ Talk about taking care of your
teeth.
Rewrite the sentences in part 5.
Do exercises in the exercise book

V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 68.
Unit eleven: Keep fit, stay healthy.
A/ A check- up.( A1 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use new words and
phrases to speak the healthy.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: check- up, medical records, take one’s temperature, measure,
scales....
2, Structures: Would you like............?
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape, a cassette player and a picture of
the lesson.
IV/ Teaching produces

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Make a question about students: Listen and answer the
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 163
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
What do you have to do to keep question.
your teeth healthy?
Ask the students to look at the
pictures and answer the questions Look at the picture and talk
about it to introduce the new about it by asking the
lesson. questions.
Who are they?
2, Where are they?
Presentation. @What do you think what they are Guess what these students
doing? are doing.
Ask them to guess, and then ask
them to read the introduction to
know the new lesson. Read silently the
Teacher makes the questions for information and then
students answer the questions.
Where are the students from? Note the new words and
They are from Quang Trung phrases.
school.
What are they doing?
They are having a medical check-
up Listen to the tape and
What will they do in a check up? repeat it
Talk to them that they can speak
by Vietnamese.
Now you read the dialogue by
listening to the tape.
Play the tape Practice the dialogue in
Have them read the dialogue while front of the class.
they listen to it
Call on some students and ask
them to read the dialogue. Listen , read and write
Listen and correct the mistakes if them.
they have.
Explain the new words and
phrases.
Take one’s temperature:
Height:
Measure: Repeat these structures.
Weigh:
Scales:
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 164
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Waiting room:
*Would you open your mouth,
please? Practice them.
Would you stand ere, please?
Would you get on the scales,
please?
( This structure is used to ask
somebody to do something )
3, Practice. *That is 37 C. That is normal. Listen the dialogue again
You are one meter 45 centimeters and number the sentences
tall. with a partner.
I’m 40 kilos.
Have the students practice in Read the keys.
pairs.
Listen and correct their mistakes.
@ Ask them to listen to the Correct.
dialogue again, and then number
the sentences by using the
information given in the Use the keys above to tell
conversation you have practiced. again the story between
Have them speak loudly in front of Hoa and a nurse.
the class.
Listen carefully and give the
correct answers: Others listen and give the
a.6- b.8- c.3- d.2-e.5-f.1-g.4-h.7 ideas yourself.
Have students tell the story again:
Hoa filled in her medical record.
4, Production. The nurse called Hoa’s name. Make a dialogue again.
Hoa left the waiting room.
The nurse took Hoa’s temperature.
The nurse measured Hoa. Do this exercise.
The nurse weighed Hoa.
The nurse told Hoa to go back to
the waiting room. Go o the board to do.
Hoa returned to the waiting room.
@ Call two students and ask them
to role on the nurse and Hoa.
( Teacher can use the open
dialogue to practice ). Correct this exercise into
Give the exercise to practice: the notebooks.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 165
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Choose the correct answer>
a. Students of my school are
having a...........check- up.
5, Home ( medicine, medium, medical ) Rewrite these duties into
work. b. I need to..............your the notebooks.
temperature.
( take, make, do )
c. You have to..........in the form
first.
( fill, feel, felt )
d. The doctor measured you
because she wanted to know
your......( high, height, weight )
@ Learn by heart the new words
and phrases.
Rewrite the sentences about
checking the health.
Do exercises into book.

V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 69.
Unit eleven: Keep fit, stay healthy.
A/ A check- up. ( A2+ A3)
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to speak the healthy by
listening and filling the medical records.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: About the healthy.
2, Structures:
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 166
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- Prepare a book, a tape and a cassette- player.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities.
1, Warm up. Make again the dialogue.
Talk about the healthy yourself. Talk about yourself.
Use the picture to introduce the Look at the picture and
listening: They are Hoa and a listen to the teacher.
doctor. Hoa is having a medical
check up. This is the conversation
between Hoa and the doctor.
However some words are
missing. You listen to it, find out
the missing words and complete
2, the conversation. Listen to the tape.
Presentation. @ Play the tape and ask the
students to listen it carefully. Find the missing words to
After the second playing, teacher complete the dialogue.
asks students to find the missing Work with a partner.
words.
Have them work with a partner, Practice the dialogue in
and then complete the dialogue. front of the class.
Call on some students to practice
the dialogue. Correct the mistake if you
Listen and correct their mistakes: have.
ask, how, your, 50, shorter, me,
tall, meter 45 centimeters, will, Make the dialogue again.
nurse, height, think, no, form.
Ask students to make the
dialogue again. Repeat the structures.
Review the structures:
-How tall are you? I’m one meter Work with a partner, then
3, Practice. 45 practice it in front of the
-How heavy are you?I’m 42 class.
kilogram
@Make some questions about
Hoa. Others listen and give the
- How old is Hoa? ideas.
- How tall is she when the nurse
measured her?
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 167
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- How heavy is she?
- Does she think she is taller or
shorter?
- How tall is she?
Teacher asks and students Talk about yourself.
answer.
Then teacher asks students to
4, Production. practice in small groups. Look at A3 and listen to
Call on some groups to ask and teacher’s explains.
answer.
Teacher can have students talk
about themselves.
@ Now you look at B3, and work
in pairs, one of you is A and the Read these new words and
other is B. Look at your copy of rewrite into your
the medical record and cover the notebooks.
other copy. In turn, A asks B
about the missing information and Listen and answer the
completes the record. teacher’s questions.
Give some new words:
- Forenames
- Surname
-Male.........> < Female............ Then makes questions and
( sex) other students answer
Teacher gives questions forms them.
A: Which class is he in?
What is his surname?
Where does he live?
What is his weight?/ How Rewrite these forms into
heavy is he? the notebooks.
What is his height?/ How tall is Can make some other
he? questions.
B: Which school does he go to?
What are his forenames?
5, Homework How old is he? Rewrite the duty into the
*teacher notices the forms: notebooks.
-What is his weight? = How heavy
is he?
-What is his height? = How tall is
he?
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 168
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Weight (n) weigh (v)
Height (n) High (a)
@ Learn by heard the structures
about height and weight.
Complete the medical record
about yourself.
Do exercises 2,3 ( 69- sbt )

V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 70.
Unit eleven: Keep fit, stay healthy
B/ What was wrong with you? ( B1 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to ask and answer about
the health and speak some names of illness.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: sick note, virus, cold, flu, headache.
2, Structures: What’s wrong with you?
Have a bad cold.
III/ Teaching aids.
-Make a plan.
-Prepare a picture of the lesson, a tape and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Call two students on, and asks
them to ask and answer about the Talk about your health.
health.
Then the teacher gives the Fill the medical records.
medical records and asks them to
work in pairs by completing them.
After that, call some students on Talk about your medical
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 169
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
to read the medical records of records.
your friends.
2, @ Use the picture to introduce Look at the picture and
Presentation. the new lesson: Who are they? listen to the teacher.
They are Lan and Mr. Tan, her
teacher. Look at the picture, listen
-Now you look at the balloon 1: and answer the teacher’s
Lan wasn’t there. She was questions.
absent.
What do you think Mr. Tan is
asking Lan? Let’s look at the Repeat and write the new
balloon 2 and answer: What’s words.
wrong with Lan?
Teacher introduces: She was Listen the tape and find out
sick. the structures that use to
We’re going to listen to the talk about health.
conversation between Lan and
Mr. Tan. Yesterday Lan was sick,
you listen and find out the Repeat the tape.
structures that use to talk about
health. Write and read these
Play the tape and ask students to words.
listen and look at the books.
Have students repeat the
dialogue.
Explain the words and phrases
that students don’t know: To be
sick. Practice this structure.
A little tired.
Stay inside
Sick note. Make a dialogue again.
Virus:
*What’s wrong/ the matter with
3, Practice. sb? Answer the questions with
-S + have/ has + name of illness. a partner.
Ex. What’s wrong with Lan
yesterday?
-She had a headache and a bad Practice in front of the
cold. class.
Ask students to practice the
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 170
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
dialogue again.
@ Have them look at “ Now Others listen and give the
answer” and answer the ideas yourself.
questions with a partner.
Call some pairs on and ask them
make questions and answers. Talk about yourself.
Give the correct answers:
-Because she had a bad cold.
-She had a headache.
-Mr. Tan told Lan to stay inside at
recess.
-The doctor said that Lan had a
virus. Work in pairs.
4, Production. -The doctor wrote Lan’s sick note.
*Make some questions about
class:
-Who was absent yesterday? Practice about the health.
-Why didn’t she/ he go to school?
-What was wrong with her/ him?
-What did you do when you were
sick? I wrote a sick note.
or I saw the doctor.
or I had to stay at
5, Homework. home.....etc Rewrite these duties into
@ Talk about yourself. the notebooks.
Teacher makes some questions
for students.
-Were you ever absent from
school last semester?
-Why? If yes.
-What was wrong with you?
Then have students practice in
front of the class.
Listen and correct their mistakes.
@ Rewrite the sentences about
health
Make the dialogue with your
friends about the health.
Do exercises 1 ( 71 sbt ).
Explain the structure: “ Had better
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 171
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
+ V ’’
-You had better stay inside.

V/ Draw experience.

Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 71.
Unit eleven: Keep fit, stay healthy.
B/ What was wrong with you? ( B 2+ B3 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to speak about the
health again by taking a survey and listening to complete the table.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: Name some of illness: flu, headache, stomachache,
sickness, absence, account for....
2, Structure: The simple past tense.
III/ Teaching aids.
-Make a plan.
-Prepare a book, a tape, a cassette player and some small papers to take a
survey.
IV/ Teaching produces

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Make some questions about
Lan and ask students to answer. Listen and answer the
Make questions about one or two teacher’s questions.
students: Were you absent from
school last semester?
Why were you absent? Read again these words.
Did you have a toothache/ a
mump/ a headache/ a
2, stomachache/ a flu?
Presentation. @ Give the surveys and explain: Look at the surveys and
These are the surveys about the work with a partner.
health of students. You now work
in the group of 4 in turn ask and
answer the given questions to
complete the survey. Fill in these surveys.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 172
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Have the students read over words
After that, the teacher asks
students to fill the name of the
students in the group and tick the Practice in front of the
illness which each of students had. class.
Call all groups on to practice
Rewrite the names of illness of Combine the results and
groups on the board. After ask which illness was the
practicing, all the groups combine most common.
the results to find out which illness Listen and answer the
was the most common. questions.
Make questions for each class:
3, Practice. -What was the most common
illness? Before listening, answer
-What was the least common the teacher’s questions.
illness?
@ Before listening, the teacher
makes questions for students:
-Who was absent from class for Listen to the tape.
one day yesterday?
-Which sickness did you/ her/ him/
them have?
Now we are going to listen to a Listen and complete the
report telling you the days’ table.
absence due to sickness of 7a.
You listen to it and complete the Talk about something what
table by writing the days in each they have just listened.
column.
Play the tape three times. After Check these sentences.
each time the teacher stops to Correct the mistakes.
check students. Then call some
students on and ask them to read
what they have just listened.
Play last the tape and stop in each Work in small groups.
4, Production sentence to check.
After that, give the correct answer;
ColdFluStomachacheHeadache Practice with a partner.
Toothache
10 43 37 5 17
Total days lost: 112
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 173
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
@ Ask students to take a survey Talk about that.
for the class by using the over
table.( Can give a mump )
Then ask students to practice with Rewrite the duty into the
5, Homework a partner about the illness. notebook
Model: -Were you absent last
semester?/ last week?/ yesterday?
-Why were you absent?
-Did you have a flu?
Listen and correct the mistakes.
@ Learn by heart all the illness
and make the sentences with
them.
Do exercises: 2,3( 72- 73sbt )

V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 72.
Unit eleven: Keep fit, stay healthy.
B/ What was wrong with you? ( B4 + B5 ).
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to talk about the
common cold by reading the text.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: common cold, runny nose, symptom, cough, sneeze, cure,
drugstore.
2, Structures: We call it the common cold because every year millions of
people catch it.
III/ Teaching aids.
-Make a plan .
-Prepare a book, a tape, a cassette player and the pictures of the common cold.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 174
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
1, Warm up Play the game: Lucky number Play the game by
Make the questions about the answering the questions.
health and the sickness.
Among the diseases you learned, Listen to the teacher and
do you know which disease is the answer the question (can
most common? The common answer by Vietnamese)
2, cold. Look at the picture in the
Presentation. @ Ask the students to look at the book and listen to the
picture and introduce the common teacher.
cold: He has a common cold.
-Do you know what symptoms of Answer this question ( can
the common cold are? answer by Vietnamese).
Tell me what are symptoms of the
common cold? Read these words and
-runny nose: Sæ mñi rewrite them into the
-a light fewer: Sèt nhÑ notebooks.
-coughing: Ho
-sneezing: h¾t h¬i Listen to the teacher.
Read a passage the common cold
and ask the students to listen to it. Read a passage.
Have students read a passage. Listen the teacher’s
Explain the new structures: explaining.
-Everybody knows the symptoms.
-Nobody knows a cure.
-These medicines don’t cure a Can these structures into
cold, but they do relieve the the notebooks.
symptoms. Read it in front of the class
Call some students on and ask
3, Practice. them to read it in front of the class. Work in a small groups by
@ Have students work with a asking and answering the
partner by asking and answering questions.
the questions. Practice in front of the
Ask them to practice in front of the class.
class.
Listen and give the correct
answers: After that, rewrite these
-Because every year millions of answers into the
people catch it. notebooks.
-They are: runny nose, a slight
fewer, coughing and sneezing.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 175
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
-No, there is no cure for the
common cold.
-No, these medicines don’t cure a
cold but they relieve the
symptoms. Make questions and
-We can prevent a cold by eating answer them again.
well, doing exercise, keeping fit
4, Production. and staying healthy. Close the books and do the
Tell them to practice again. teacher’s request.
Listen and correct their mistakes.
@ Ask students to close the books Tell about yourself.
and work in small groups by writing
the symptoms of the common cold
and how can prevent a cold. Answer these questions.
Then answer the questions about
you:
-Do you have a common cold?
-What are the symptoms of the
common cold?
-How do you feel? Practice in front of the
-What do you do when you have a class.
5, Homework. common cold?
-How can you do to prevent a Rewrite into the notebooks.
cold?
After that, ask students to practice
with a partner.
@ Read and learn by heart the
words.
Rewrite the answers and
remember into the notebooks.
Do exercises in the exercise book

V/ Draw experience.

Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 73+ 74.
Let’s eat!
Unit twelve:
A/ What shall we eat? (A1+A2+A4)

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 176
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to tell about the food
throughout the dialogue.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: chicken, beef, pork, pea, carrot, cucumber, spinach,
papaya, pineapple...
2, Structures: Let’s........
too/ so; either/ neither
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape, a cassette- player and a picture of the dialogue.
IV/ Teaching produces.
Stages Teacher’s activities Students activities
1, Warm up @Talk about the common cold. Go to board and talk about
Hang the pictures of fruits and food the common cold.
on the board and ask students Look at the picture and
answer the questions: How many speak the names of fruits
fruits and food have you known in and food that you know.
English in the picture?
2, @ Now you continue looking at the
Presentatio picture and male a list of the fruits/ Talk the names of fruits
n. food which you haven’t known their and food that you don’t
English names in Vietnamese? know by Vietnamese.
Explain the meaning of these words: Read after the teacher
Beef : thÞt bß Spinach: rau these words and rewrite
ch©n vÞt them into the notebooks.
Pork : thÞt lîn Cucumber: d a
chuét
Pea : ®Ëu Papaya: ®u ®ñ
Carrot ; cµ rèt Pineapple døa
Chicken : thÞt gµ Durian: sÇu riªng Listen to the tape and
Have them read these words. repeat it.
Then play the tape and ask students
to listen it carefully and answer the
question what they bought. Make again the dialogue
Teacher can give the words which with a partner then practice
the students don’t know in front of the class.
Meat stall
A selection of:
Vegetable stall Read these words.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 177
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
On display:
What about....
Ripe :
Smell Listen to the explaining of
Teacher can stop at each paragraph the teacher.
of dialogue to explain the new words
and structures:
*DiÔn t¶ sù ®ång t×nh phñ ®Þnh Rewrite these structures
(còng kh«ng thÕ) into your notebooks.
- I don’t like pork
- Neither do I/ I don’t either.
* DiÔn t¶ sù ®ång t×nh kh¼ng ®×nh Some students give the
( còng sentences like that.
thÕ)
- I’d like some carrot, too.
- I like cucumber.
So do I/ I do, too. Work with a partner.
3, Practice. * What about spinach and
cucumber? Answer the teacher’s
- I’d like them questions.
@ Ask students to work with a
partner by making again the Then work in small groups
dialogue. about this.
Listen and correct their mistakes
*Have students answer the
4, questions: Make the dialogue with a
Production. -Who doesn’t like pork? partner then practice in
-What do they buy first? front of the class.
-Who likes to buy papaya and
pineapple? Others listen and give the
-What do they buy finally? ideas.
@ Ask students use the structures
that they have just learnt to make Rewrite these duties into
sentences. your notebooks.
Form: A: I’d like chicken.
5Homewor B: I do, too/ So do I.
k A: What about beef?
B: I don’t like it.
A: Neither do I/ I don’t either.
Use the words that are in A4 to write
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 178
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
sentences.
Call some students and ask them to
write.
@ Learn by heart all the words and
structures.
Answer again the questions.
Do exercises into ex. book


V/ Draw experience.

Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 75
Let’s eat!
Unit twelve:
A/ What shall we eat?(A3+ A5)
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to know how to prepare
the meals and use recipe to make some food.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: cook, boil, heat, stir- fry, slice......
2, Structures: First, she sliced the beef.
Then, she sliced some green peppers and onions.
Next, she cooked some rice.
After that, she made cucumber salad.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape, a cassette player and some
pictures .
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students activities

1, Warm up @ Read and write all the names of
fruits and food that you know, then Write the names of the fruits
answer the question: which fruits and food.
and food do you like and dislike? Answer the questions:
Do you always cook meals? -Yes, I do.
Do you like this work? -Yes, I do.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 179
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
What do you do when you cook Can speak by Vietnamese.
2 meals?
Presentation @ Give some words to answer Listen and read these words.
this question: slice, boil, heat, stir-
fry, add Read this text carefully
Now you look at the picture and
answer what they are doing?
After that, ask students to read Read and write these words.
carefully to answer the questions.
Go around the class to help the
students reading and finding the
new words :
- Green pepper: ít xanh.
- Salt: muèi
- Vegetable oid: DÇu thùc vËt
- Soy sauce: x× dÇu Read loundly in front of the
- Cucumber salad: sa l¸t da chuét class.
- Chopsticks: ®òa
- Spoon: th×a
- Glass: cèc Answer the teacher’s
Call some students on and ask questions, and then practice
them to read the text. with a partner by making
Listen and correct the mistakes if questions and answering
they have. them.
@ Make questions for students: - She cooked dinner.
3, Practice. -What did Hoa’s aunt cook? -First, she slice the beef.
-What did she do first/ next? Next, she slice some green
-How did she poil the spinach? peppers and onions.
-What did she do last? -She added a little salt to the
-What did Hoa do? spinach so it tasted good.
Have students make questions -She sliced the cucumbers
and answer questions by working and made cucumber salad.
with a partner and then practicing -Hoa set the table with
in front of the class. places, bowls, chopsticks,
Listen and correct their mistakes. spoons and glasses.
Now you look at part a : Answer Write the menu.
the question and answer: What did Compare with a partner and
Hoa, her uncle and aunt have for then read your menu in front
dinner? Write the menu. of the class.
Give the menu:- Cucumber salad
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 180
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
with onions. - Boiled Look at these pictures and
spinach. fill the missing words, after
- Stir- fried beef that put them in order to.
with green peppers and onions.
- Rice.
Now you look at part b, and do the Listen and correct the
followings: This is the recipe Hoa’ mistakes if you have.
aunt used. You look at the
passage again and add the
missing verbs to complete the Some students go to board
instruction and then match and put the pictures in order
instructions to the pictures. to.
Ask students to compare with a
partner and then read loudly in
front of the class.
Give the missing verbs: slice the Look at the pictures and talk
beef/ slice the green pepper and about them.
onions/ heat the pan/ stir- fried the
beef/ add some soy sauce to the Others listen to and give the
dish/ boil rice/ add salt to the dish. ideas.

*Matching the instructions to the
pictures: 1- c; 2- f; 3- a; 4- d; 5- b; Rewrite these duties into the
6-e; 7- g. notebooks.
4, @ Use the pictures in pages 117
Production again and ask students to put
them in the order that you have
just learnt and talk about them.
After that, ask students to talk
again how to prepare a meal and
the names of things in the meals.
@ Read again the text.
5, Learn by heart.
Homework Do exercise 5( 76- sbt)

V/ Draw experience.




Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 181
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh

Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 76.
Unit twelve: Let’s eat!
B/ Our food ( B1 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of he lesson, the students will be able to speak about food that
is caused the disease.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: terrible, probably, dirt, sick.
2, Structures: It must be......
It was probably..............
Make somebody do something.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape, a cassette player and a picture.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Talk about how to cook rice/ Do this exercise.
how to boil the vegetable.
Or ask students to take part in a
recipe- writing competition for rice Work in the groups.
cooking by working in groups,
using the verbs and structures you
have learned. In 5 minutes, which Talk about this.
group complete the recipe most
quickly, will be winner.
Go around the class to help the
students, and then give them the Listen to the teacher.
recipe: First, you put water in the
pot and boil it. Next let it boil 5’.
Finally serve it.
2, @ Now you look at the picture and Look at the picture and
Presentation. answer the question: answer the question.
Where is Ba? He is in the hospital.
Can you guess what is wrong with Guess what is wrong with
him Ba.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 182
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- He has a stomachache.
Now you tell me what causes
stomachache? Talk about the causes(can
If students don’t talk by English, talk by Vietnamese )
they can talk by Vietnamese.
You are going to listen to the Listen to the tape to
conversation between Ba and the answer why Ba had a
doctor at the surgery. You answer stomachache.
the question: Why did Ba have a
stomachache?
Play the tape, and ask students to
listen carefully. Guess to answer that
After playing the tape three times, question.
ask them to guess and answer that
question.
Write the students’ answers on the Read the dialogue.
board, and then have students
read again the dialogue.
Listen and correct their mistakes if
they have. Listen and rewrite these
Give the new words and phrases: new words and phrases.
-It must be.... ch¾c h¼n lµ
-It’s probably... ch¾c cã thÓ lµ
-Make somebody do something:
Lµm
cho ai ®ã thÕ nµo Read after the teacher.
Ex. It must be something you ate.
It was probably the spinach.
That dirt can make you sick. Listen to the tape again
Play the tape again and ask and answer the question
students to answer the over over.
question.
Compare with the first answer of
students.
Have students rewrite the question Copy the answer and
and answer into the notebooks. question.
*Why did Ba have a
stomachache?
3, Practice. He had a stomachache because Look at this and complete
he didn’t wash spinach well. the passage.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 183
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
@ Now look at the “ Now complete
the story ’’ and complete the Compare with a partner.
passage using the information in
the conversation. Practice in front of the
Ask students to do this, and class.
compare with a partner.
Then call some students on to Correct the mistakes.
read the answers. After that, give
the correct answers: doctor/ sick/ Now answer these
asked/ had/ spinach/wash/ more questions:
carefully/ vegetables/ make/ she/ -Because he was sick.
medicine. -Because he ate some
Can make some questions about spinach last night.
this passage: Why did Ba go to the -He must wash the spinach
doctor? well.
Why was he sick? The dirt can make people
4, Production. What did the doctor say to sick.
Ba? What can make people -Yes, we must.
sick?
Must we wash the Answer and make some
vegetable carefully? sentences with should and
@ In addition to having a shouldn’t.
stomachache which diseases are
caused from food?
To avoid stomachache and other Rewrite these duties into
5, Homework. food- related diseases, what notebooks
should we do and what shouldn’t
we do?
- We
should........
- We
shouldn’t ...
Ask students to make sentences to
answer this question.
@ Learn by heart.
Read the dialogue again.
Do exercise 1,2 in the pages 76-
77 sbt
V/ Draw experience.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 184
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 77.
Unit twelve: Let’s eat!
B/ Our food. ( B2 )
I/ Objectivies.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to speak importance of
food to keep fit and stay healthy.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: healthy/ unhealthy food, building food, moderate amounts,
energy, products, cereals, healthy lifestyle
2, Structures: the simple tense
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape, a cassette- player and some other things.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Make questions for students: Answer the questions:
-Have you ever have a - Yes/ No.
stomachache? - Because I ate too much
-Why did you have a candies.
stomachache? - Yes, I did.
-Did you have to go to the doctor? - I needn’t eat too much
-What did the doctor say to you? candy.
You know that food plays an Listen to the teacher. Note
important part in our life. It gives us the new words.
the main energy for body
development. Thus, a balanced
died is especially important. In our
today’s lesson, we’ll learn about
2, the definition of a balanced diet Listen and answer.
Presentation and useful guidelines about food. (By the students)
@ Make questions for students:
-What is your favorite food?
-What do you always have for
breakfast/ lunch/ dinner?
-Do you think your died is Listen to the tape carefully.
balanced?

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 185
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
To know whether your diet is
balanced or not, you will find the Repeat after the tape.
right answer in our lesson.
Play the tape and ask students to Read it in front of the class.
listen while looking at the books.
Then, have them repeat the text.
Call some students on and let Read and write these
them to read the text in front of the words.
class.
Listen and correct their mistakes if
they have.
Give the meaning of the new
words and phrases:
-healthy food >< unhealthy food
-Moderate amounts khèi lîng hîp lý
-energy n¨ng lîng
-balanced diet chÕ ®é ¨n hîp lý
-fatty food thøc ¨n gi»u chÊt bÐo Read again the text.
-body- building food
3, Practice. -dairy products thùc phÈm b¬ Work in groups or with a
s÷a partner.
-a variety of ®a d¹ng
-cereals ngò cèc Rewrite these answers into
@ Talk students to read again the the notebooks.
text and answer the questions in
the book
Ask them to work with a partner,
then have them practice in front of Answer the questions and
the class then work with a partner by
4, Production Listen and give the correct making questions and
answers: answers.
-Sugar adds taste to food and
gives you energy.
-A balanced diet is not enough, all Others listen and correct
people need exercise to keep a the mistakes.
healthy life.
@ Talk about you Talk about this.
Do you think your died is
balanced? Rewrite these duties into
Why? Why not? the notebooks.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 186
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
5, Homework -Yes, because I eat a moderate
amount .
-No, because I don’t eat fatty food.
Ask students to practice with a
partner Teacher can talk about
The pyramid food.
*Repeat again the advantages of
eating sugar and balanced diet.
@ Tell the main of the text.
Learn by heart.
Answer again the questions into
the notebooks.
Do ex. Test yourself 4 into
exercise book.

V/ Draw experience.
Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 78.
Unit twelve: Let’s eat.
B/ Our food. ( B3+ B4 )
I/ Objectivies.
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to speak about the food and
write the menu about a healthy and balances meal by listening and writing.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: About the food.
2, Structures: Use the simple tense.
III/ Teaching aids.
-Make a plan.
-Prepare a book, a tape, a cassette- player and some pictures in the book.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Talk about: -The importance of Go to board and talk about
food. this.
-The advantages of
sugar. Others listen and give
-What food should we ideas.
2,Presentati eat/ shouldn’t eat –What does a “
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 187
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
on balanced diet” mean? Listen to the teacher.
@ How do you cook to have a meal
healthy and balanced? In the past
period, you learned about a Look at the book and do
balanced diet. Today we will further teacher’s guidance.
study about this concept through a
menu for your self and family. Now
you look at part 3 and the pie chart.
They are three main food:
-Body- building: bread, fish, Use those words to write a
milk....... menu for yourself and your
-Energy- giving: honey, candy, family.
cake...
-Protective: pineapple, spinach...
Now you use those foods to write a
menu for yourself and your family,
including details of breakfast, lunch Compare with a partner.
and dinner. Remember to make Practice in front of the
your meal healthy and balanced. class.
Go around class to help the Correct the mistakes.
students.
3, Practice Ask students to compare with a Look at these pictures and
partner, and then call some groups, talk about them.
ask them to read the menu yourself.
Listen, correct and give the ideas. Read after the teacher.
@ To practice the food, the teacher
asks students to look at these
pictures and tell the names of these Listen to the teacher
foods. carefully.
Guide reading these words again:
rice, noodles, fish, vegetables,
fruits, beef, juice and water.
Before playing the tape, teacher
explains that this is conversation
about Lan, Ba, Nga and Hoa. Now Listen to the tape and put
you hear and tell what they ate and the words that you heard
drank among the food and drinks under Nga, Lan, Ba and
mentioned above by writing the Hoa.
letters a, b, c...next to each person
corresponding with the food and Give these words you
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 188
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
drinks they used. heard
Then, teacher plays the tape and
asks the students to listen it
carefully. Listen and correct the
Have them compare with a partner. mistakes.
After that, call some students and
ask them to read aloud in frond of
the class.
4,Production Listen and correct their mistakes Play the game.
. and give the correct answers:
-Lan: b, d, f, g.
-Ba: c, a, e, h.
-Nga: a, d, g. Write a menu for your
-Hoa: b, e, g. family.
Play the tape again and ask
students to repeat the conversation.
@ Hold the class to play the
following game: Write many names
of foods and drinks on the board,
ask students to find the foods and Write these duties into your
drinks that Hoa, Nga, Ba and Lan notebooks.
5, used.
Homework And then, ask students to use these
foods and drinks to write a menu for
yourself and your family but
remember to make your meal
healthy and balanced.
Call 3 or 4 students, if whoever
writes faster and fuller, that will be a
winner.
@ Learn by heart.
Write a menu for your family.
Do exercises into ex. book
V/ Draw experience.

Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 79.
Language focus 4.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 189
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
I/ Objectivies.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to do the exercises
exactly.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: Review all the words.
2, Structures: The present simple tense and the simple past tense.
III/ Teaching aids.
-Make a plan.
-Prepare a book, pictures in the text book.
IV/ teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students activities.
1, Warm up. Make questions for students
- Do you like eating candy? Listen and answer
- What does a “ balance diet ’’ teacher’s questions.
mean?
- What do you do for your health?
- Do you usually do exercise?
- Were you ever absent from
school last semester?
2, - Did you have a bad cold? Repeat using and form of
Presentation @ From last questions, the teacher the simple past tense.
and Practice asks student to speak again the
form and the use of the present
past tense.
Let students to look at these Work with a partner, then
pictures and talk about it. practice in front of he class.
Listen and give the correct
answers:
a. No, I didn’t. I watched TV. Others listen and give the
b. No, I didn’t. I had dinner in a ideas.
restaurant.
c. No, I didn’t. I went to the movie
theater yesterday.
d. No, I didn’t. I read a book on the
weekend.
e. No, I didn’t. I played football Look at the pictures and
yesterday. talk about them.
*Use indefinite quantifiers: a little,
a lot of/ lots of, too much.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 190
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Ask students to look at these
pictures and use the indefinite Correct the mistakes.
quantifiers over.
a. a little coffee.
b. A lot of tea.
c. A little sugar.
d. A lot of salt.
e. Too much coffee. Make the dialogue with a
After that, have students complete partner and practice in front
the dialogue by using a little, a lot of the class.
of, lots of and too much.
Call some students on, and ask
them make the dialogue: a little, a
lot, a little, a lot of, too much, a Listen and repeat
little.
*Review using so, neither, too,
either
Guide doing the exercise by giving Practice the dialogue.
a form: a, I like mangoes.
-I like mangoes, too/ So do
I.
b. I don’t like papaya. Answer the questions of
- I don’t like either/ Neither the teacher.
do I
Have students work with a partner
to complete the dialogue.
Listen and correct their mistakes if
they have. Make a cucumber salad wit
*Before making cucumber salad, a partner.
the teacher makes some questions
about food: Do you like cucumber
salad? Talk about this in front of
-Yes, I do. the class.
What about you, B?
- I like, too
Do you know how to make a
cucumber salad? Rewrite into the notebooks
4, Homework Now I will tell you to make a
cucumber salad:
-Ingredients: ( in the text book )
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 191
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
-Making: use these following
verbs: peel, wash, slice, mix, add,
stir, wait.
Ask them to speak about this in
front of the class.
@ Do again those into your
notebooks.
Learn by heart them.
Do exercise 4( 73- sbt )

V/ Draw experience.



Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 81.
Unit thirteen: Activities.
A/ Sports ( A1+ A2 ).
I/ Objectives
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to describe and speak
about sports and entertainment.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: Names of ports such as skateboarding, rollerblading, roller-
skating...
2, Structures: Using adjectives and adverbs and model verbs.
III/ Teaching aids.
-Make a plan.
-Prepare a book, a tape, a cassette- player and some pictures of sports.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Make questions for students: Listen to teacher and
-What do you usually do in your answer the questions.
free time? ( By the students )
-Do you like playing soccer?
-When do you usually play it?
-What sports do you think popular?
What sports do you like best?
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 192
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
2, @ You know playing sports is one Listen carefully.
Presentation. of the most popular free time
activities around the world. In this
lesson and in the following ones
we will learn about this topic.
Now you look at the pictures of Look at the pictures in the
sports in the book and tell the book and tell the names of
names of these sports. these sports.
Teacher can ask students speak If they don’t speak by
by Vietnamese: soccer, tennis, English.
swimming Read these words and
-Roller- skating: rewrite into notebooks.
-Rollerblading:
These about are 5 among 10
sports which American teenagers Guess 5 sports rest.
like most. Can you guess rest?
Rewrite 5 sports which students
guess on the board. Read these words.
After that, ask them to read the
result of a survey carried out
recently about the most 10 popular Hear 10 popular sports
sports among American teenagers.
You hear and look at the book and
find out what ten sports are .
Compare with the earlier guess. Listen and tell the names
Play the tape, and have students the other sports that you
listen. heard.
Tell students to name the other
sports which you hear: baseball,
skateboarding, badminton,
volleyball, basketball. Repeat again these words.
Play the tape again, and explain
the meaning of new words:
-Surprising results:
-The most popular choice:
-One of the world’s most popular
3, Practice. games: Answer these questions.
@ You have learned 10 sports ( by the students )
which American teenagers like
most. Do you think it is the same in
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 193
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Vietnam? And which sport is the Work with a partner.
most popular in Viet Nam?
Ask students to look at the survey
and ask your classmates what Practice in front of the
sport they like most. class. Others listen and
You can use these questions: correct their mistakes.
Which sport do you like best?
Go around the class and help
students. Talk about the sports again
4, Production. Rewrite the results on the board that the students in
and find which sport they like best. American and Vietnamese
@ Ask students to talk about 10 like best.
sports which American teenagers Then ask the questions of
like best. the teacher.
Make questions for students:
-What do you usually do in your After that, they work with a
free time? partner and practice in front
-Do you like playing sports? of the class.
-Which sport do you like best?
-When do you usually play it?
Have them do this exercise: Read Do this exercise.
the following names of sports and
decide whether they are team
sports, or individual sports by Rewrite the correct
completing the chart: basketball, answers into notebooks.
5, Homework. badminton, volleyball,
rollerblading, tennis, swimming, Rewrite these duties into
baseball and football. your notebooks.
Give the correct answers:
@ Learn by heat all the names of
sports
-Name the sports you like best.
-Do exercises:

V/ Draw experience.



Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 194
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Period 82.
Unit thirteen: Activities.
A/ Sports. ( A3+ A5 ).
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use the adverbs of
manner and know forms of adverbs from adjectives.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: Adjectives and adverbs.
2, Structures: He’s a good soccer player.
He plays soccer well.
III/ Teaching aids.
-Make a plan.
-Prepare a book, a tape and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Make questions for students: Listen and answer the
- Which sports do American questions of teacher.
teenagers like best?
- What about Vietnamese ( by students )
teenagers?
- Which sport do you like best?
- Do you play it well?
2,Presentati - Are you a good player? Listen to the teacher.
on @ You play soccer well so you are
a good player. Look at these pictures and
Now you look at these pictures that talk about them.
are in the book and tell the name of
them. Answer: He is playing
Or ask students: What is he/ she soccer.
playing Listen the tape and repeat.
Listen and correct their mistakes.
Play the tape and ask them to listen Answer this question.
to the tape carefully. Then have
them repeat.
Make question: How does he play
soccer? – He plays soccer well.
*In English in order to express how Listen and repeat.
someone do something we use

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 195
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
adverbs of manner. Practice in front of the
*Most of these adverbs are formed class these adjectives and
as follows: Adjective + ly= adverb adverbs.
skillful skillfully
slow slowly
bad badly Others listen.
quick quickly
safe safely
Ask students to practice these
sentences with a partner and then in
front of the class. Make sentences with a
Listen and correct their mistakes. partner, using these
Explain using the adjectives and adjectives and adverbs.
adverbs: He plays soccer well.
He is a good soccer player
- Give some especial adverbs Listen and repeat, and then
good well rewrite into the notebook.
fast fast
late late Look at the pictures and
3, Practice hard hard answer questions.
early early
@ Now you look at the pictures in
the pages 133 and answer the
questions:
-What sport is it in the picture? Listen to the teacher
Swimming. carefully.
-Do you like swimming? Why?
-Where can we go swimming?
Now we read a passage about Read the passage and
safety awareness in the swimming write these new words.
pool or on the beach.
Read the passage and explain the
meaning of the new words:
-Summer is on its way: kú nghØ hÌ Read and practice these
®ang ®Õn words and phrases.
-Water safety awareness: chó ý vÒ sù
an toµn díi níc
-Aim: môc ®Ých Do the exercise by
-Pool lifeguard: ngêi cøu hé changing the adjectives to
-Pool edge:c¹nh bÓ b¬i adverbs.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 196
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
-Obey: tu©n theo
-Red and yellow flags: cê ®á vµ cê Listen and correct the
vµng mistakes.
Ask students to read it carefully and
change the adjectives in brackets to Read and rewrite these
adverbs. words into the notebook.
Have them work in small groups.
Call on some groups and ask them
to read their keys.
Listen and give the correct answers: Give ideas.
Clear clearly
Careful carefully Talk about these pictures
Safe safely
4, again.
Careless carelessly
Production
Strict strictly Do this exercise.
What do you think about the
position of the adverbs you have -slowly/ slow
done?
Give the comments. -quickly/ quick
@ Use the pictures that are in part
A3 to practice. -carefully/ careful
Listen to and correct the mistakes.
* Complete the sentences, use the -skillful/ skillfully
adjectives or adverbs in bracket.
-My mother cycles............ She -well/ good
is ........cyclist. ( slow/ slowly )
-Ba’s sister swims...........She is
a........swimmer. ( quick/ quickly )
-Mr. Hai drives............He is a Rewrite these duties into
.......driver.( careful/ carefully ) the notebook
-He plays table tennis.............he is
5,
a.......player.( skillful/ skillfully )
Homework
-The boys in my class play
soccer........They are........players.
(Good/ well)
Call students to give the correct
answers
@ Learn by heart all adjectives and
adverbs.
Rewrite the part A5 into your
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 197
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
notebook.
Do exercise 1,2 in the exercise
book.

V/ Draw experience.

Preparatory date
Teaching date:
Period 83.
Unit three: Let’s eat!
A/ Sports. (A4+ A6 )
I/ Objectives
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to hold using the adverbs
through the reading.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: walking, competition, wish, organize, participant, increase,
ability.
2, Structures: Using the adjectives and adverbs.
III/ Teaching aid.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape, a cassette player and some pictures of walking.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up Make sentences with these Go to board and make the
adjectives and adverbs: good/ well, sentences with these
skillful/ skillfully, bad/ badly. adjectives and adverbs.
Ask some questions about students
-Do you usually play sports every Answer the questions
day?
-What sport do you play?
2,Presentati -Do you like walking? Look at the picture and talk
on @ Now you look at this picture and about it by asking the
answer the questions: questions of teacher.
- What are they doing?
- Do you always take a walk?
- What are the benefits of walking? Listen to teacher.
Nowadays, many people like
walking because it is very benefits
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 198
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
for their health. You are going to
read a passage about walking- one
of the most popular sport activities.
After that you answer the questions Listen to the tape and read
in your book. it.
Read or play the tape. Practice with a partner and
Guide the students to read a find the new words.
passage. Can go around the class
to help them finding the new words: Read again these words
- Walking for fun- WFF: and rewrite them into the
- Competition: sù tham gia notebook.
- Prize: gi¶i thëng
- Organize: tæ chøc
- Participant: ngêi tham gia
- Increase: t¨ng
- Instead of taking motorbike: thay Practice in front of the
thÕ class.
Call on some students to read this
3, Practice. passage. Listen and correct their Work with a partner.
mistake if they have. Answer the questions
@ Have students answer the
questions by working with a partner. Make questions and
Next, make questions in order to answers.
students answer. Others listen and give the
Call some students on and ask ideas.
them to make questions and
answers. Rewrite the correct
Then, give the correct answers: answers into the
-He takes part in Walking For Fun notebooks.
club.
-The writer’s school team won the
first prize, they were so happy and
wanted to keep the activity. Talk about these answers
-One activity is a 5 km walk to the again.
beach on Sunday morning, and
other walk- to- school day.
4, -It’s 5 km from school to the beach. Read a passage again.
Production -Wednesday is the WTS.
-Members living near school often Talk about the benefits of
take part in the WTS. walking.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 199
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
@ Have students read again a
passage and then talk about the Answer the questions.
benefits of walking. - Walking is very fun, easy
Listen and give the comments: fun, and inexpensive.
easy, inexpensive, for everyone, - Everyone can take part in
healthy.... it.
Can make some questions: - Walking is very healthy
-Is walking happy/ fun/ easy/ for everyone.
expensive? Talk about yourselves.
-Can everyone take part in walking?
-Is walking healthy for everyone?
*Talk about you: Do you always
walk everyday? Do you like Rewrite these duties into
5, it? notebook.
Homework Do you think of
walking? Does everyone
living next door to you walk, too?
@ Rewrite the answers into your
notebooks. Rewrite the benefits of
walk
Preperatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 84.
Let’s eat!
Unit thirteen:
B/ Come and play. ( B1+ B4 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use the model verbs
(should, must, should, have to, can...........) through the dialogue about sports.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: paddle, spare, and model verbs.
2, Structures: I ought to finish my homework.
I also have to finish this question for Math tomorrow.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape, a cassette player and a pictures of sports,
especially table tennis.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 200
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
1, Warm up @ Do you usually play sport? Listen and answer
When do you usually play sport? teacher’s questions.
What sport do you like best? Others listen and give the
Can you play table tennis? ideas.
Is it interesting?
2,Presentati @ Now you look at this picture and
on answer the questions: Look at the picture and
-How many students are there in answer the questions:
this picture? Who are they? There are two. They are Ba
What are they playing? and Nam.
Now you listen to the conversation
between Ba and Nam, then answer Listen to the tape carefully
the question: What should they do and repeat it while
before they play table tennis? listening.
Play the tape and ask students to
listen it carefully. Read the dialogue in front
Play the tape again and have of the class.
students ask the question: Answer the questions with
Can Nam play table tennis? Why a partner and then in front
not? of the class.
Should Nam finish his homework
before he plays table tennis?
Must Ba finish his homework?
Ask students to read the dialogue
and ask questions again. Look at part “ Questions ”
3, Practice @ Have students look at the and answer them with a
questions and ask them to work partner.
with a partner.
Go around the class and help them.
Make the questions for students.
Let students to practice in front of
the class. Listen and correct their Make questions and
mistakes if they have. answers in front of the
Play the tape again, and ask again class.
the questions above. Write these
sentences on the board: Listen and correct the
*Nam can’t play table tennis. answers.
Nam should finish his homework
before he plays table tennis.
Nam must do his homework first. Rewrite the correct
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 201
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Ba also has to finish this question answers into notebooks.
for Math tomorrow.
Explain these sentences: can,
should, must, have to, ought to, Listen to teacher carefully.
could are model verbs.
Uses: After model verbs add verb
4, infinitive Make the dialogue again.
Production @ Use the picture to make the Talk about you by asking
dialogue again. the questions of teacher.
Then ask students to talk about
themselves by asking these
questions: Tell about this topic.
Can you play football now? Why
not?
Must you stay inside?
To study well, what must/ should/ Read the text and work
shouldn’t we do? with a partner.
Listen and correct their mistakes. Compare with some
Ask students to do the part B4. friends.
Explain: you read the text and fill in Practice in front of the
the space with the most suitable class. Correct the
model verbs. Ask them to work with mistakes.
a partner.
5, Give the keys: can, must, must not, Write these duties into
Homework should, can, ought to/ should, can/ notebook.
should, should/ must.
@ Learn by heart.
Rewrite the sentences used model
verbs
Make 5 sentences with model
verbs.
Do exercise2,3 in pages 84-85 sbt.

V/ Draw experience.

Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 85
Activities.
Unit thirteen:

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 202
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
B/ Come and play. ( B2 + B3 ).
I/ Objectives
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to read comprehension
about scuba- diving and practice about model verbs.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: ocean, pearl diver, special breathing equipment, deep- sea
diving vessel, explore...
2, Structures: Use the modal verbs.
III/ Teaching aids.
Make a plan.
Prepare a book, a tape, a cassette player and some pictures of the sports
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Can Nam play table tennis? Go to the board and answer
What must he do before he plays teacher’s questions about
table tennis? Nam and yourself.
What about you? What can you -Nam can’t play table
play? tennis.
You have learned about model -He must do his homework.
verbs, the way to make and refuse
an invitation. We continue to Listen to the tape carefully.
2, practice these verbs.
Presentation @ Play the tape and ask students Work with a partner.
to listen to it
Have them work with a partner. Make new dialogue by
Now you change the underlined using these words that are
details in the box,
Using the formation in the box to
make up similar dialogue. Look at the pictures and
Before students make up the answer the question.
dialogue, teacher has them look at
the pictures and ask: What are Practice in front of the
they playing? class.
Then, call on students and let Others listen and give the
them practice the dialogue in front ideas.
of the class. Look at the pictures and
3, Practice Listen and correct their mistakes. listen to the teacher
@ Ask students to look at the
pictures in pages 136 and talk: Guess which sport it is.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 203
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
This is a sport which we have Answer the questions to
never learned before. -- Now you find the new words.
tell me which sport it is: scuba- Repeat these words and
diving. rewrite them into the
- Where can you play this sport: notebook.
oceans
- To scuba- dive, what equipment
do we need/ have to do? Special Read this text carefully and
breathing equipment. find the main idea.
- How do we call living things in
the deep- sea? Underwater life.
Ask students to read a passage Work with a partner.
about scuba- diving and tell the
main idea after the first reading. Give the answer.
After the second reading, have
them decide whether the
statements are true or false. Read again the text and
Call students to give the answers, correct the mistake.
and then give the correct answers:
False, True, False, True. Listen and answer the
Ask students to read the text again questions.
4, Production in front of the class. Listen and
correct their mistakes. Others listen and give the
@ Ask students to read again the correct answers.
text again and make some
questions about the text:
- May we know the land very well? Then rewrite the correct
Could man not stay underwater? answers into the notebook.
Could man swim freely underwater
after the invention of equipment?
Who invented a deep- sea diving
vessel? Read again these
What can we do nowadays? sentences
• We may know the land but we And talk about using the
know very little about the model verbs.
oceans.
• Man could not stay underwater.
• After the invention of special
breathing equipment, man
could swim freely underwater.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 204
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
• Nowadays, we can explore the Rewrite the duties into the
5, Homework
oceans, using special TV notebooks.
camera as well.
@ Read and answer the questions
again.
Make the dialogue by using the
words
Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 86.
Unit fourteen: Freetime fun.
A/ Time for TV. ( A1 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson. The students will be able to speak about activities
freetime, especially speak about TV.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: News, series, prefer, sound, boring, guess.
2, Structures: They prefer to do other things.
We like to do different things.
I’d like to come and watch that.
III/ Teaching aids.
Make a plan.
Prepare a book, a tape, a cassette- player and a picture in the book.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Ask students to talk about scuba- Go to board and talk about
diving with special breathing this.
equipment Do the teacher’s guidelines
Make a survey about what you and answer the questions.
usually do in freetime.
Make questions:
How many students watch TV in Answer.
their freetime?
What time do you always watch TV?
What is your favorite program?
2,Presentati Do you like to watch TV, too? Look at the picture and
on @ Now you look at the picture in the answer the questions.
book, and answer a question: What
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 205
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
are they doing? They are playing
chess.
When do they play it? Can you Listen to teacher.
guess?
Do they watch TV?
Watching TV is one of the most Listen to the tape carefully.
popular activities in freetime. You Repeat the dialogue.
listen to a conversation between
Lan and Hoa. Wok with a partner.
Play the tape twice or three times,
and have students repeat the
dialogue.
Listen and correct their mistakes if Practice the dialogue in
they have. front of the class.
Ask them to work with a partner by
reading again the dialogue.
Go around class and help them if Read these new words and
they need. structures.
Call some students and let them to
make dialogue in front of the class.
Give and explain the new words Rewrite them into the
and structures: notebook.
a. They prefer to do other things.
_She prefer to read books to
newspapers
b. We like to do different things.
-I like to watch TV. Answer the questions.
c. Would you like to have dinner at
my house tonight? Practice with a partner.
-I’d love to.
News in English:
Series: “ The adventure of
the Cricket ”
Ask them ask a question: What
does Hoa’s family do in their Read and make questions
3, Practice. freetime? again.
-They talk about their day, usually *Lan invites Hoa to eat
read and sometimes play chess. dinner at her house.
What do Lan’s family do in their She wants Hoa to watch
freetime? TV after dinner.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 206
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Her family watches TV every night. No, because they prefer to
@ Have students read again the do other things.
dialogue and answer some Yes, she does.
questions about the dialogue.
What does Lan invite Hoa to do?
What does Lan want Hoa to do after Do the part: Choose the
dinner? best answer.
Does Hoa’s family watch TV? Why
not Close the books and
4, Does Hoa enjoy “ The adventure of answer again the
Production the Cricket ” ? questions.
After that, ask them choose the best
answer. Talk about yourselves.
Have students give their answers.
Correct their mistakes and give the
correct keys: a. C; b. A; c. B; d. C;
e. D Students’ answers.
@ Let them to close the books and
answer again the questions about
the dialogue.
Now you talk about yourselves
What do you usually do in your
freetime?
Do you like always to watch TV?
What is your favorite program?
5, Does your Mom? Dad like to watch Rewrite these duties into
Homework TV? notebooks.
What does he/ she prefer to do in
his/ her freetime?
Ask them to practice with a partner.
Listen and correct their mistakes if
they have.
@ Talk about Hoa’s family and
Lan’s family: What does Hoa’s
family/ Lan’s family do in their
freetime?
Do again part: Choose the correct
answer into your notebook.
Learn by heart the new words and
structures.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 207
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Talk about you about watching TV.

V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 87.
Unit fourteen: Freetime fun.
A/ Time for TV. ( A2 + A4 ).

I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson the students continue to speak about activities in
the freetime and review the structure: Would you like to + V infinitive.........
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: about advertisements.
2, Structures: Would you like to + V infinitive.............
What would you like to + V infinitive..............?
III/ Teaching aids.
Make a plan.
Prepare a book, a tape, a cassette player and the advertisements in the
books.
IV/ Teaching produces.
Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1,Warm up Do you like to watch TV in your
freetime? Go to the board and
What is your favorite program? answer the questions.
In your freetime somebody likes to
watch TV, someone likes to see Listen to the teacher.
movies, but someone like to play
soccer.....etc. If you like to see
movie, which program do you like
2, best? Look at the advertisements
Presentation @ Now you look at these and talk about them.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 208
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
advertisements and talk about Read after the teacher.
them.
Guide students reading these Practice with a partner.
advertisements and explain the
meaning of them:
Ha Noi Youth Culture House: Rewrite these sentences
Pop concert: into notebook.
Ha Noi Opera House:
Classical concert:
Detective movie:
Nightly:
New Age theater: Read again the sentences
Youth theater: in front of the class.
Every night except Monday:
Have them practice these
advertisements in front of the Listen to the tape.
class.
Listen and correct their mistakes.
You are going to listen to a
conversation between Hoa and Repeat the dialogue while
Lan. They are discussing the listening.
suitable program to see. You listen Work with a partner.
and answer: which program will
they see? Practice in front of the
Play the tape and ask students to class.
repeat it .
Have them work with a partner and
then call on some students and Answer these questions.
ask them make a dialogue again.
Listen and correct their mistakes.
Make questions: Read again these
- Which program will they see? advertisements and talk
3, Practice. They will see a cowboy movie. about them.
- When will they see it? Make up a similar
They will see it on Sunday night. conversation and then
@ Ask them to read again the practice in front of the
dialogue and have them look the class.
advertisement,
then make up a similar
conversation. Talk about these
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 209
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
First ask them to practice with a sentences.
partner and then practice in front of
the class.
Listen and correct their mistakes if Using the invitations to
4, Production they have. make up other dialogue.
Notes these sentences:
- Would you like to+ V infinitive. To talk about you, using
-What would you like to+ V these questions.
infinitive.
-Can you make it on........?
@ Use the invitations to make up
the conversations, note the
refutations and exceptions.
Talk about you: Rewrite these duties into
5, Homework. - Do you like to see a movie? the notebooks.
-Which program do you like best?
-How often do you go to the movie
theater?
-When do you usually go to the
movie theater?
@ Learn by heart all the words.
Read again the dialogue.
Do exercise 2,3 sbt.


V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 88.
Unit fourteen: Freetime fun.
A/ Time for TV. ( A3 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to speak about the title of
TV and know the development of TV in Vietnam.
II/ Language contents .

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 210
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
1, Vocabulary: gather, black and white programs, might, change,
comfortable, together, owner
2, Structures: What would you like to watch.......? I’d like to........
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape a cassette player and some pictures in the book.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Use the advertisements to ask Go to the board and make
students to make up the dialogue. the dialogue by using the
Have students talk about you by advertisements.
asking the teacher’s questions: Other student answers
What do you usually do in your teacher’s questions.
freetime?
Do you like to see movie? Listen and give the ideas.
What about TV? Do you like to
watch?
2, @ Now today we’ll learn about TV Listen to teacher.
Presentation in Viet Nam.
Ask students to look at the pictures Look at the pictures and
and the title: “ TV in Viet Nam ’’ guess what the reading is
and guess what the reading is about.
about.
After that, use the pictures to Listen to teacher and
introduce the new words and answer the questions.
phrases by making the questions:
P1: Did many people in VN have Can answer by Vietnamese
TV set in their home 30 years ago? and English.
What did they always do after
dinners? Note the new words and
Where did they watch TV? phrases:
What color were the TV TV set, nowadays, gather,
programs 30 years ago? outside, inside owners TV,
P2: Do many people have TV in own.
their home nowadays?
Where do they watch it? Practice these words.
What color are they?
Guide the students to asking and
give the correct answers:
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 211
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Only a few people had TV sets 30 Listen to teacher and
years ago. They watched TV after repeat this.
dinners and they gathered both
outside and inside their neighbors’
home. They are black and while Others listen and give the
program. But nowadays, many ideas.
families have a TV set and they sit
in their own living rooms to watch.
They don’t spend much time
together any more.
Explain new words and phrases: Rewrite these words into
TV owners: Nh÷ng nhµ cã ti vi notebooks.
Gather: tô tËp
Any more: kh«ng cßn n÷a
Neighbor: ngêi hµng xãm
Black and while program: Work with a partner.
Ask students to read the reading Practice the reading in front
with a partner and practice in front of the class.
of class.
3, Practice. Listen and correct their mistakes. Close the books and
@ Ask the students to read again answer again the
the reading . questions.
Have them close the books and
look at the pictures to answer the
questions again.
Then ask them to ask and answer Do the exercise.
in front of the class.
After that, have them complete
the summary. Work in small groups.
Read and explain doing it. Give the keys.
Ask them to work in small groups
and give the ideas of own group. Correct the mistakes.
Listen and give the correct
answers: Read again in front of the
People, not, TV, popular, evening, class.
gather, they, today, have, life,
know. Answer the teacher’s
Let them to read it in front of the questions.
4, Production class.
Make again the questions and ask Play the game.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 212
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
students to answer.
Note again the main of reading. Correct the mistakes.
@ Hold the class to play the game
by using the small papers to put Talk about you by answer
order in the passage. teacher’s questions.
Have them correct, and then read
whole the reading.
Or play True/ false.
5, Homework What about you: Rewrite these duties into
Does your family have a TV set? notebooks
Do you like to watch it?
Which program do you like best?
When do you usually watch TV?
@ Read again the reading.
Rewrite part: complete the
summary.


Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 89.
Freetime fun.
Unit fourteen:
B/ What’s on?( B1+ B4)
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to speak about TV and
talk about programs they like best throughout the dialogue.
II Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: to be on, program for teenagers, sport shows, cartoon.
2, Structures: Like to do or like doing.
Prefer to do or Prefer doing.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape, a cassette player and pictures of TV.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Ask students to talk about the Go to board and talk about
development of TV in Viet Nam. this.
Use the game Lucky Number to
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 213
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
check old lesson: Do you like to Answer the questions by
watch TV? taking the numbers and
Which program do you like ? answer the teacher’s
2, When do you usually watch TV? questions.
Presentation @ Use the picture to introduce the
new lesson by making the Look at the picture to
questions: answer the questions:
What program is on TV now? Note the new words.
Cartoon.
Do you like to watch cartoon on
TV? Answer the questions.
Which character do you like best?
Now you listen to conversation
between Ba and Nga and answer
the questions: What are they talking Listen to the tape
about? Do they like cartoon? carefully.
What program do they
like to watch? Read the dialogue in front
Play the tape and ask students to of the class.
listen it carefully.
Have them repeat while they
listening.
Call some students on and ask
them to read the dialogue in front of Read and listen to this
the class. carefully.
Listen and correct their mistakes if
they have.
Talk about the structures:
*Like doing: ThÝch lµm g× ( thµnh
thãi quen hoÆc së thÝch ) Rewrite them into
Like to do: ThÝch/ muèn lµm g× notebooks.
vµo 1 ®iÓm cô thÓ nµo ®ã.
I don’t like watching sports.
On Sunday, I like to play sports.
3, Practice. *Prefer to do / prefer doing Make questions with a
I prefer taking part in them. partner.
I prefer to drink orange juice.
@ Ask them to read the dialogue
again ask look at the question to
answer them
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 214
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
First, make questions for students Listen and correct the
and then, ask them to make mistakes.
questions and answer them.
Listen, correct their mistakes if they
have and give the correct answers:
-No, because there aren’t any good Rewrite them into
programs for teenagers. notebooks.
-Ba watches sports shows,
cartoons and movies.
-Nga likes to watch programs about
teenagers in other countries.
-Because they don’t play the kind of Do this part.
the music she likes.
-In the evening Nga is going to Work with a partner.
listen to the radio and maybe read
a book.
*To understand more about TV Read the whole the
program ask students to complete passage.
the passage by using the words in
4, Production the box
Have them work with a partner and Answer the questions.
then ask them to give their keys.
Listen and correct their mistakes:
around, watch, listen, series, show, Can work in small groups.
like, station, receive, cities,
possible. Talk about you.
@ Let students to read the whole
the reading and answer the
questions: This question you can
-What is the most popular TV show practice with a partner or
in a lot of countries? The most in small groups.
popular TV shows are series in a lot
of countries.
-What do many teenagers like? Rewrite these sentences
They like pop music. into books.
-What about you? What kinds of
program do you like? Why?
-Which program do you prefer?
5, Homework. -What do you think about the TV
programs for teenagers in Viet
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 215
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Nam? Rewrite these duties into
-Are these enough programs for the notebooks.
teenagers? Are they good?
*I like watching programs for
teenagers
Because they are very interesting.
I prefer cartoons.
They aren’t enough programs for us
but they are good and interesting.
@ Talk about program teenagers in
Viet Nam and in the world like to
watch.
Male a dialogue with a friend about
TV.
Rewrite the part: Remember into
the notebooks. And learn by heart
all the words and phrases.

V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 90.

Freetime fun.
Unit fourteen:
B/ What’s on?( B2+ B3)
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to talk by English about
the most popular TV programs by listening comprehension.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: Early News, Weather forecast, The World Today ......etc.
2, Structures: What is on today?
The present simple tense.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 216
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape, a cassette player and some pictures in the book.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Make questions for students: Go to board and answer
- Did you watch TV last night? the teacher’s questions.
- Which program did you like
best?
- What about a sport show? Can answer by Vietnamese
- Do you name some programs
2, you saw on TV last night?
Presentation. @ Use the above question to Listen to teacher.
introduce the programs are in the
book. Talk about these program
- Children’s programs: C. T thiÕu
nhi
- Early News: B¶n tin chµo buæi Read and write
s¸ng
- Weather forecast: Dù b¸o thêi Listen to the aim of
tiÕt. listening.
- The World Today: ThÕ giíi ngµy
nay
- Movie: “ A Fistful of dolar ”:
Guide students to read these
programs and explain the aim of
listening. This is a conversation
between Lan and Ba. They are Listen to the conversation
going talking about the times of and write down the time
the TV programs we’ve that you heard.
discussed. You listen and write
down the time of the above Give the keys.
programs.
Play the tape, and ask students to Listen to the tape again
listen it carefully and write down and correct the mistakes.
the time of these programs.
Call on some students and ask
them to read their keys.
Listen and give the correct time
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 217
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- a. at five
- b. at six Look at these pictures and
- c. at ten past ten. talk about them.
- d. at a quarter past six.
- e. at seven. Then listen to the
* We know that nowadays there explanation of the teacher.
are many popular and interesting
programs on TV. You look at Repeat them and rewrite
these pictures and you can into notebooks.
recognize the characters in each
picture. Now you talk about them.
Give the characters in pictures:
- The Moffats band: Ban nh¹c Listen and read.
- 4 contestants of the road to the
Olympia Peak:
The famous detective Sherlock
Holmes Read the reading while
Make a question: In which listening.
programs do these scenes
usually appear? Work with a partner
The moffats- pop music.
Contestants- TV contests.
Sherlock Holmes- imports Listen and answer the
Play the tape and ask students to questions:
repeat while they listening. - Popular music.
Ask them to practice with a - They are contest of
partner, and then have them read knowledge, folk music,
it in front of the class. games, sports.....
Listen and correct their mistakes - They can join in the
if they have. Make questions for contest through telephone
each passage. or mail.
a. What is the long fom of pop - Imports are foreign series
music? such as Sherlock Holmes.
b. What are the common kinds of
contest? Look at the questions in the
How can viewers join in the book and answer by
3, Practice. contest? working with a partner.
c. What are the imports?

Listen and repeat these
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 218
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
answers.
@ After that, ask them to look at
the questions in the books and
work with a partner.
Call on some students and let Practice in small groups.
them to answer.
Listen and give the correct
answers.
-Teenagers like to hear the latest
pop music and see the shows of Read the whole the
their favorite artists. reading.
- In contest program, the
contestants are students, workers
or family numbers. Read these new words.
- Imports usually include police
and hospital series.
- (Students’ answer) Answer teacher’s
4, Production. Have students read the whole questions.
reading and ask them to practice
about it.
Listen and correct their mistake Do a survey by making
and give the new words: questions and answering
Audience, artist, perform, them.
knowledge
contestant, join in, series,
cheaply.
@ Talk about you:
Make questions for students: Answer this question.
Do you like watching TV?
What is your most favorite
program?
5, Homework. Ask students to ask each others
and make a survey by using the Rewrite these duties into
questions above. the notebooks.
Give some other program people
like
- World discover: Kh¸m ph¸ thÕ
giíi
- Music gifl: Quµ tÆng ©m nh¹c
- Cookery show: Trang néi trî
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 219
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Collect the survey and ask
students to answer: Which is the
most popular you like watching?
@ Talk about the programs you
like watching on VTV.
Talk about the most popular
program the teenages in over the
world like watching.
Read the reading and learn by
heard the new words.

V/ Draw experience.

Preparatory date:Teaching date:
Period: 91
Going out.
Unit fifteen:
A/ Video games.( A1 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the student will be able to hold the advice about
the video games.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: amusement center, video games,addictive, arcade.
2, Structures: Don’t + V.inf
III/ Teaching aids.
-Make a plan.
-Prepare a book, a tape, a cassette player and some pictures of video games.
IV/ Teaching produces

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Hold the class to play a game: Play this game.
Networks by telling the names of
the entertainment.
Ask students to look at the picture Look at the picture and
and ask: What do you see in the answer the teacher’s
picture? questions. Note the new
Amusement Center words.
Are there any amusement centers
in your town? Can speak by Vietnamese.
Do you often go to an amusement
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 220
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
center? ( If yes )
2, What do you usually do there? Listen to conversation
Presentation. @ Now you listen to the between Nga and Nam.
conversation between Lan and
Nam. Nam is going to the
amusement center, you listen to it Guess what Nam will do in
and tell me what he will do there. the amusement center.
Have students guess what Nam
will do there. Read swiftly while listening
Play the tape, and ask students to to the tape.
listen carefully and read swiftly
while listening.
Explain the words that students Read these words and
don’t know the mean. write them into notebooks.
- Video games: Trß ch¬i ®iÖn tö
- Addictive: G©y nghiÖn. Practice with a partner.
- Arcade: Khu vui ch¬i cã m¸i vßm
Have students practice this Read the dialogue in front
dialogue by reading with a partner. of the class.
Call some students on and ask
them to make a dialogue in front of
the class.
3, Practice. Listen to them carefully and correct Listen to teacher and
their mistakes. answer the teacher’s
@ Ask them to read again this questions.
dialogue and make questions for
them:
- Where is Nam going?
- What is he going to do?
- How often does he go?
- Does he spent a lot of money?
- How long does he usually stay?
- Why must he be careful?
- What will he do later?
* Video games can be addictive if Make questions with
you play too much. partners, and then practice
- Don’t spend too much of your in front of the class.
time in the arcade.(This is a advice
for you)
Ask students to practice in small
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 221
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
4, Production groups by making the questions Talk the harms and
and answering them. interests of video games.
Listen and correct their mistakes if ( in small groups ).
they have.
@ Can video games be harmful?
Yes, video games can be harmful
and addictive if you play too much.
But video games help you relax Listen and correct the
after hard working day. mistakes.
Now you work in groups listing the
bad effects caused by video Rewrite these words into
games. notebooks.
Go around the class and help the
groups if they need.
Can give some words to help the
students :
Do harm to eyes: Lµm h¹i m¾t Talk about yourself.
Backache: §au lng
Waste time and money: L·ng
phÝ.....
Learn worse: häc hµnh sa sót
* Talk about you: Repeat and rewrite.
Do you often play video games?
Where do you usually play video
games?
5, Homework When do you play it? Write these duties into
Do you play too much? Why not? notebook.
Ask them talk about yourself.
* Give an advice
- Don’t play video games too
much.
- Don’t worry. I won’t.
@ Learn by heart the advises and
respondent.
Write 5 advises for you: need do
and needn’t do in your free time.
Rewrite the answers into your
notebooks.

V/ Draw experience.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 222
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh

Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 92.
Unit fifteen: Going out.
A/ Video games.( A2 + A3 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to talk about the video
games and know the bad effects of it.
II/ Language contents.
1, vocabulary: inventor, dizzy, outdoor, social skills, develop, premises,
robber, roberry, teaching aid, VCR, VCDs.
2, Structures: Modal verbs.
III/ Teaching aid.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape and a cassette player.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Make questions for students. Answer the teacher’s
- Who usually play video games? questions.
- How long do they play it? Other listen and correct
- What effets caused by video their mistakes.
games?
You knew the bad effects on video
games if we play too much. Today Listen to teacher.
we continue with this topic. In the
reading, the doctor will give you
some advice that prevent video
games from becoming addictive. In
2, your opinion, what are the advice. Listen to the tape carefully
Presentation @ Play the tape twice and ask
students to listen to reading Listen and read it while
carefully. listening
Play the tape again and have
students repeat the reading while Find the new words and
listening. structures.
Explain the new words:
- Dizzy: chãng mÆt Read and write.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 223
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- Play outdoor: ch¬i ngoµi trêi Practice with a partner.
- Social skills: kü n¨ng giao tiÕp x·
héi
- Develop: ph¸t triÓn
Ask students to read the reading Read the text in front of the
with a partner. class.
Go around the class and help them Listen to and answer
reading. teacher’s questions:
Call some students on, and ask -millions of young people
them to read the reading. play video games.
Listen and correct their mistakes. -Some play them at home,
Make questions for students: others play them in
- Who play video games? arcades.
- Where do they play them? -No, they shouldn’t.
- Should they spend much time on Because they can become
these games? Why not? tired or dizzy.
- What does the doctor say? -This is very bad for
Have students look at the part: children. They should play
Now answer. Complete the outdoor and develop their
sentences by choosing the best social skills.
suitable word.
3, Practice Give the answers: Read again the text answer
1- d 2- a 3- d 4- b these questions

Others listen and give the
@ Ask students to read the ideas.
reading again and ask the
questions:
- What bad effects of video
games? Listen to the teacher.
Tired/ dizzy/ backache/ spend time
on their time..... Read the passage and
- What advises about this? complete it by putting the
Play outdoor/ take part in activities correct word in the
with others/ develop social skills/ brackets.
be with people of their age......
* Have students read the reading
in pages 149. Tell about the aim of Give the ideas.
this exercise: use the words in the
box to complete the passage.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 224
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Don’t give the new words and ask Correct and write into the
them to do with a partner. notebooks.
Go around the class and help
students if they need. Answer this question.
Call students and ask them to give
own keys. Listen and give the
correct answers: be, have, is, Repeat these answers.
identify, are, use, can, will, buy,
show.
Have students read the passage
and answer a question: What are
the applications of videos? Talk about you by
4, Production - Video protect the premises in the answering teacher’s
bank and stores. questions.
- Videos are used in university as a
teaching aid.
- Videos are important in the ( by students’ )
music industry.
Have students read again the
passage. Listen and give the ideas.
@ Talk about you by answering
the questions:
- What do you usually do in your
freetime?
- Do you see video or play video
games? Rewrite these duties into
5, Homework - What are harmful of playing too the notebooks.
much video games?
- Do you usually play it?
- Are you tired? dizzy? backache?
- In your opinion, what need you
do in your freetime?
Listen and correct their mistakes if
they have.
@ Read the reading more times.
Learn by heart all the words.
Rewrite the advises of the doctor.
Do exercises: 2, 3( 94- 95 sgk)

V/ Draw experience.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 225
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh



Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 93.
Unit fifteen: Going out.
B/ In the city( B1 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to talk about the city
throughout a dialogue.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: busy road, traffic, direction, motorbike awake, scare, hate,
neighborhood
2, Structures: The life in the city is very noise , the roads are busy
The life in the village is quiet, and there is a little traffic.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape, a cassette player and a picture of the city.
IV/ Teaching produces.
Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Talk the useful of video . Go to the board and
Talk the harm of video games. answer teacher’s questions
Introduce the new lesson by
making some questions about
students: ( by students )
-Do you live in the city or in the
town?
-Do you like living the city? Why or
2, warm up why not? Look at the picture and
-What different from city and answer a question.
village?
@ Now you look at the picture in Listen and note the new
the book. Show the picture and words.
talk about it: This is a city. What do
you can see in it?
Bikes, motorbikes, cars.....are Listen to the tape carefully.
called traffics. This is a busy road.
Now you listen to conversation

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 226
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
between Lan and Hoa and answer
the question: What did they talk to Read it while listening.
each other? Practice with a partner and
Play the tape and ask students to then read it in front of the
listen it carefully. class.
Tell them to repeat while listening.
Call some students on and ask Read these new words and
them to read in frond of the class. structures.
Give the meaning of the new
words:
Rest: phÇn cßn l¹i Rewrite these words into
Different: kh¸c nhau the notebooks.
Quiet: Kh¸
Hate= dislike: ghÐt, kh«ng thÝch
Noise: ån µo
Awake: thøc giÊc
Direction: sù chØ dÉn
Scare: sî h·i Listen and read again.
used to: quen.
Keep me awake:
Get used to the noise:
Play the tape again and ask Look at the questions in the
3, Practice. students to read the dialogue. book and work in small
Listen and correct their mistakes if groups.
they have.
@ Have students look at these Give the own answers.
questions in the book and ask
them to work in small groups.
Go around the class and help them
if they need. Listen to teacher and
Call some groups on and let them correct the mistakes.
to give the answers.
Listen and give the correct
answers:
a. Hoa goes to the school theater
one a week. The rest of the
week she usually stay at home Rewrite d, e and f into the
in the evening. notebooks.
b. No, she doesn’t like the city.
c. Before, Hoa lived in a village
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 227
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
near Hue.
d. She liked living in a village
because she knew all the
people in her neighborhood; the
village was quiet and there was
only a little traffic.
e. She doesn’t like the city Make questions and
because it is noisy and the answers again.
roads are busy.
f. She hates crossing the road
5, most because bikes, motorbikes Work in small groups.
Presentation and cars come from every
direction, and they scare her.
Have students practice again Talk again the advantages
these questions and answers in and disadvantages in the
front of the class. Listen and city and in the village.
correct their mistakes
@ Ask students to work in small
groups by talking the advantages If you have time you rewrite
and disadvantages in the city and these into notebooks.
in the village.
Advantages in the city in the By students
village
Comfortable quiet
A lot of a little
traffic
Entertainment fresh air
Good education
Dis advan- crowded few
enter-
Tages noisy
tainment
Heavy traffic boring
*Now you talk about you
What do you do in the evening?
Do you like the city? Why? Why
not?
Do you like the countryside? Why?
Why not?
Ask students to use those
questions to ask each other and
answer them.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 228
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 74.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 229
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Unit fifteen: Going out.
B/ In the city. (B2+ B4)
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to talk about the city and
the countryside, listen to activities in the freetime.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: the words about the city and the countryside, activities in the
freetime
2, Structures: The simple past tense and the simple tense.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape, a cassette player and some pictures of activities
in the freetime.
IV/ Teaching produces

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Use the picture which is in the Look at this picture and
past lesson to check old lesson by answer the questions.
making the questions:
- Is this picture of the city? - Yes, it is.
- What do you see in this picture? - I saw mane traffic.
- Do you like living in the city? Why - By student
or why not?
Talk about the city again. A student talks again the
Do you like the countryside? Why or city and the countryside.
why not?
2,Presentati @ Now you look at the questions in Work with a partner by
on the pages 151 and answer them answering the questions.
with a partner.
Tell them to work with a partner or Practice in front of the
in the small groups. class.
Go around the class and help them
to practice.
Then call on some groups and ask Others listen and give the
them to practice in front of the class. ideas.
Listen and correct their mistakes if
they have. And then give them Talk about the advantages
some sentences about advantages, and disadvantages in the
disadvantages when you living in city and countryside.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 230
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
the city and in the countryside.
- I don’t like living in the city
because it is very noisy and it has
many busy roads there.
- I like to live in the city because it
has a lot of entertainment and good
education.
@ Ask students what they usually Listen to the teacher and
3, Practice do in their freetime. answer the teacher’s
Then introduce the pictures in the questions.
part b4: They are the entertainment
activities in the city. Now you talk
about them Look at these pictures and
- play chess. talk about them.
- Play table tennis
- Listen to music Listen to the tape carefully
- see a movie. and match them.
- watch a soccer match.
- Go to the restaurant Tell the keys.
These are 6 activities that Ba, Hoa,
Nga, Nam, Lan and An did - Ba played table tennis.
yesterday evening. Now you listen - Nga saw a movie.
to the tape and match each name to - Lan went to a restaurant.
an activity. - Hoa played chess.
Play the tape and ask students to - Nam listen to CDs.
listen to it carefully and match each - An watched a soccer
name to an activity. match.
Call on some students and ask
them to read their keys.
Then give the correct answers: Ba-
b; Hoa- a; Nga- d; Nam-c; Lan- f;
An-e. Answer the teacher’s
Play the tape again to check. questions.
Make questions for students:
- What did Hoa do yesterday
evening? Practice in front of the
- Did Nga see a movie? class.
- What about Lan?
4, Ask students to answer these Talk about you.
Production questions . By students.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 231
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Listen and correct their mistakes.
@ Have students talk about you by Others listen to and give
asking the questions: the comments.
- What did you do yesterday
evening? -The city has only a little
- Where do you live? traffic, and it has it has a lot
- Do you like the city? of noise. But I will get used
- Why do you like the city? to it soon.
- Why don’t you like the
5, countryside?
Homework I don’t like the countryside because
it is boring. It has a few Rewrite these duties into
entertainment. the notebooks.
I prefer the city to the countryside.
@ Write the advantages and
advantages in the city and in the
countryside.
Answer these questions:
-What do you usually play in your
freetime?
- What did you do in the yesterday
evening?
- What do you prefer? City or
countryside? Why?

V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 96
Unit fifteen: Going out.
B/ In the city. (B3)
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to understand more
about the city throughout the reading comprehension.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 232
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: used to, get used to, socialize, enjoy, decide
2, Structures: Hoa soon got used to the busy city traffic
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, atape, and a cassette- player.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Make questions about Hoa:
- What does Hoa do in the Listen to teacher and
evening? answer the questions
- Does Hoa like the city? Why not? about Hoa.
- What did Lan tell to Hoa?
Lan told that Hoa will get used to Guess: Will Hoa used to
the city soon. the city soon?
Can you guess will Hoa get used How did she do?
2, to it soon? How did Hoa do? Listen to the teacher.
Presentation. @ Now today we are going to read
the text about Hoa and answer the
question: what could Hoa do in the
city? Scan the reading and find
Ask students to scan the reading the new words.
and finds the new words and new
phrases
Explain these words and phrases: Read these words and
- Help each other: rewrite them into
- Together: notebooks.
- Far too expensive:
- Eat out:
- Socialize:
- Public library: Read after the teacher.
- After all:
Help them to read the text again. Read loudly in frond of the
Call on some students and ask class.
them to read it in front of the class.
Listen and correct their mistakes if Answer the teacher’s
they have. questions.
Make questions so that students
answer about Hoa. Others listen and correct
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 233
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- Did Hoa get used to the city? the mistakes.
- What could Hoa do?
- What did Hoa and her friends do
when she go out?
- Why did Hoa rarely go to see
movies or eat out in the evening?
- What did she prefer to do?
- Why did Hoa decide that the city
wasn’t so bad after all?
Listen to students and correct their
3, Practice. mistakes if they have. Read again the reading
@ Have students to read again and make questions to
the reading, and then ask them to each other.
practice with a partner by making
questions and answer them. Practice with a partner by
Listen and correct their mistakes. making questions and
Make again the question to find answering.
the main meaning of the text.
After that, ask students to make a Rewrite in the paper.
list of the things Hoa usually did in
the evening, using the simple
present tense.
- She usually visits, talks and Compare with a partner
listens to music. and talk about in front of
- She plays table tennis and plays the class.
chess with her friends.
- She socializes with her friends. Rewrite into the
- She goes to the library and notebooks.
borrows books regularly.
Call some students on and ask
them to give own writing.
If have time, can ask them to write
4, Production on the board and correct each Talk about you by
sentence. answering the questions.
@ Have students to read again
the reading, and then ask some By students.
questions about you.
- Do you like the city? Why?
- Are you scared when you cross
the busy road?
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 234
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
What do you usually do in the
5, Homework evening? Rewrite these duties into
Can guide students to answer. notebooks
@ Read more time the reading.
Write about you: Do you like the
city or the countryside? Why?
Write the differences from the city
and the countryside.

V/ Draw experience.




Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 97
People and places.
Unit sixteen:
A/ Famous places in Asia. (A1)

I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to know some famous
places in Asia.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: The countries in Asia and capitals of them.
2, Structures: The past simple and simple present tense.
III/ Teaching aids.
- Make a plan.
- Prepare a book, a tape, a cassette- player and some
pictures of capital of Asian countries.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Talk about Hoa by answering Go to board and answer
the question: What did Hoa get the teacher’s questions.
used to do in the city?
- Can you name some countries By students.
by English?
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 235
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
Among the counties over, which
are in Asia?
2, @ Ask students to look at the Look at the picture in the
Presentation postcard and the sentence in it: book and notice the
Greetings from Bangkok! sentence: Greeting from
Now answer the questions: Bangkok!
- Where is Bangkok? In Thailand.
- What do you know about
Thailand?
Thailand is a country in Asia. Name the countries are in
Besides Thailand, which counties South East Asia you know
and their capitals in South East
Asia do you know?
Now you are going to listen a Listen to teacher.
conversation between Hoa and
Ba and answer the question:
Which places her uncle flew to? Listen to the tape to name
Play the tape and ask students to the places you heard.
name places that are in the tape.
Play the tape again and name the Read these places.
places: Bangkok, Hong Kong,
Kuala Lumpur, Singapore,
Jakarta, Phnom Penh, Vientiane
and Yangon.
Have students read these names. Read the dialogue while
Play the tape again and ask listening.
students to read after the tape
while listening. Read with a partner and
Ask them to read with a partner read in frond of the class.
and after that let them to practice
it in front of the class. Notice these sentences.
Listen and correct their mistakes.
Explain these words:
3, Practice - It’s his job to fly there. Read the dialogue again.
- Occasionally:
@ Have students read again the Answer these questions:
reading. - He is a pilot.
Make some questions in so that - He sent this postcard
the students answer. from Bangkok.
- What does Mr. Nghia do? - It is in Thailand
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 236
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- Where did he send this - He flies to Hong Kong...
postcard?
- Where is that?
- Where does he fly to?
*Mr Nghia is a pilot. He sent this Look at the match and do it
postcard from Bangkok. It is in with a partner.
Thailand. He flies to Hong Kong,
Kuala Lumpur, Singapore... Read the keys.
Then ask students to match the
half- sentences by working with a
partner. Listen and correct the
After that, call on some students mistakes.
and let them to read the keys.
Listen and correct their mistakes
a. D Read again these
b. F sentences.
c. B
d. C
4, e. A
Presentation. f. E Read again the dialogue.
Have students read again these
sentences. Talk about Mr. Nghia,
@ Let them to read again the especially about the places
dialogue and ask them to talk where he usually flies.
about Mr. Nghia, especially talk
about the places that he usually Answer the teacher’s
flies. questions.
And make questions for
students:
Do you know where are these Talk about the countries
capitals? you know.
- These capitals of the countries
5, Homework. are in South East Asia. Rewrite the duties into the
Which countries are in South notebooks
East Asia?
If the students don’t talk by
English, they can speak by
Vietnamese.
@ Read more time the dialogue.
Rewrite these sentences you
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 237
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
have just matched.
Name the countries are in South
East Asia you know
Preparatory date:
Teacing date:
Period 98.
Unit sixteen: People and places.
A/ Famous places in Asia. ( A2+ A3 )
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to talk about the names
of countries in South East Asia and the capital of these countries.
II/ Language contents .
1, Vocabulary: The counties in South East Asia and the capitals of them.
2,Structures: The simple tense with the adverbs.
III/ Teaching aid.
-Make a plan.
- Prepare a tape, a cassette player and some pictures of countries in South
East Asia and the capitals of them.
IV/ Teaching produces.

Stages Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1, Warm up @ Do you remember Mr. Nghia in Listen to and talk about
last lesson? Now you talk about that.
him and the places where he
usually flies. Others listen and give the
Now you look at the box in the comments.
book. The words in the box are the
names of some Asian counties, tell
2, me which counties they are. Look at the box and read
Presentation @ Ask students to read the names them.
of these countries.
Listen and correct their mistakes if
they have. Read more times these
Give the names of these countries: countries with a partner
- Cambodia: C¨m pu chia and then practice in front of
- Myanmar: Mi- an- ma the class.
- Indonesia: In- ®«- nª- xi- a
- Malaysia: Ma- lai- xi- a Rewrite these countries
- China: Trung quèc
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 238
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
- Thailand: Th¸i lan
- Laos: Lµo
Now you look at the below table. Read the capitals in the
We have capital names of 7 box.
countries you have learned. You
complete the table by matching Work with a partner by
the names with the countries. matching.
Ask students to work this. Read the keys.
Have them read loudly the
sentences that you did.
Listen and correct their mistakes if
they have. Correct the mistakes.
Capital Country
Bangkok Thailand Read these words.
Beijing China
Kuala Lumpur Malaysia
Phnom Penh Cambodia
Vientiane Laos Practice in front of class.
Yangon Myanmar
Jakarta Indonesia
*Answer the questions: Practice in front of the
Where does Ba’s uncle fly to? class by answering the
He usually flies to Bangkok. questions.
Where is that?
It is in Thailand. Work with a partner by
You use the other words to replace replacing those words.
underlined words.
Call some students and ask them Others listen to and correct
practice in front of the class. the mistakes.
Listen and correct their mistakes.
3, Practice. @ You look at the picture in 156
pages and answer the questions: Look at the picture and
Where is this man? answer the questions:
What does he do? Why do you He is at the airport.
know? He is a pilot.
What does a pilot do every day? He flies to the other
You look at part 2 ( page 156 ). countries.
This is one pilot’s schedule from
Monday to Sunday. You listen to
the tape and complete the
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 239
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
schedule by writing the names of Listen to the tape carefully
the places that the pilot flew to. and name the places you
Play the tape and ask them to heard.
listen to carefully.
Have them give the places where Check the mistakes.
they have listened.
Correct the mistakes and give the
correct places. Read these places.
Monday Bangkok and
Singapore
Tuesday Singapore
Wednesday Jakarta
Thursday Bali
Friday Bali
4, Production Saturday Hong Kong Make sentences the same
Sunday back to Ha Noi example
@ You look at the schedule and
make sentences: Can work with a partner.
For example: He flew to Bangkok
and Singapore on Monday.
Ask students to make sentences. -Yes, i know.
Call some students give the Yes, it is.
sentences. Yes, it is.
After that talk to students:
Do you know Laos? No, it isn’t
Is it in South East Asia?
Is it big?
Does it border with Viet Nam? Rewrite the duties into the
5, Homework. Is its capital Vientiane? books
Make questions as the same that.
Listen and correct their mistakes.
@ Name the capitals of Asian
countries and learn by heart.
Do exercise 1,2 in page 100.

V/ Draw experience.




Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 240
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh



Preparatory date:
Teaching date:
Period 99.
Unit sixteen: People and places.
A/ Famous places in Asia (A4)
I/ Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to understand deeply
about Asia through the reading.
II/ Language contents.
1, Vocabulary: ancient monuments, Khmer/ Buddhist temples, puppet shows,
resorts.
2, Structures:
If you are interested in history, you could visit many ancient monuments.
You may be interested in the traditions of different cultures.
III/ Teaching aids.




Full name:
Class: 7 Dong Giao school
§iÓm Lêi phª cña c« gi¸o

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 241
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh



I/ Write the correct tense of verbs in brackets .(2m)
1, Tan often (listen)......................to pop music in his freetime. He (not
like)..............
(watch)..................TV.
2, People (gather).........................in TV owners’ houses to watch TV in 1960s.
3, Lan prefers (take)....................part in sports to (watch)..............them on TV.
4, Mr Ba (be)............. in his room now. He (read)...............................a
newspaper.
II/ Make questions, using the words given .(2m)
1, We watched TV in our living room last night.
-
Where.......................................................................................................................
.....
2, She likes cartoons best.
-
What.........................................................................................................................
.....
3, My friend always goes to school by bike.
-
How..........................................................................................................................
.....
4, I will invite some friends on my birthday next week.
-
Who..........................................................................................................................
....
III/ Choose the best suitable word to complete the following sentences.( 2m)
1, Nam plays volleyball.............................( skillful, skillfully, skill)
2, She ought to.....................her homework before going to bed. (finishes,
finished, finishing, finish)
3, We don’t like.............................soccer. (play, plays, playing, played)
IV/ Read the text carefully and answer the questions .(2m)
In 1960s, most people in Viet Nam didn’t have a TV set. The people with
TVs popular. In the evening, the neighbors gathered around the TV. They stayed
until the TV programs finished. Viet Nam is different today. More families have a
TV set and life is more comfortable. But neighbors don’t know each other as well
as they did in the past because they watch TV in their own living room.

Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 242
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
1, Did most people have a TV set in
1960s? ...........................................................
2, What did the neighbors do in the
evening? ..........................................................
3, How is life today in Viet
Nam?.................................................................................
4, Where do people watch TV
today? ....................................................................
V/ Make new sentences. Use the cue words. (2m)
1, Nam/ like/ watch TV.
.................................................................................
2, Chi/ prefer/ pop music/ classical music.
.................................................................................................................................
.......
3, I/ buy/ some flowers/ my mother’s birthday/ last week.
.................................................................................................................................
........
4, They/ often/ listen/ radio/ when/ they/ be/free.
.................................................................................................................................
........
Full name:
Class: 7 Dong Giao school
§iÓm Lêi phª cña c« gi¸o



I/ Choose the best answer to complete the following sentences . (2m)
1, He is a .......................driver. (careful/ carefully/ care)
2, Lan prefers ....................soccer games on TV. (watch/ watches/ watched/
watching)
3, Teenagers like to listen to the ................pop music. ( late/ latest/ later/ newest)
4, ..................do you watch TV? Every night. (How long/ how far/ When/ How
often)
II/ Write the correct tense of verbs in bracket. (2m)
1, Lan usually (play)....................tennis on Sunday.
4, My parents (take)..................me to the movies last night.
3, She (not study)..................English well last semester, so she (get)............bad
marks
4, She has to (see)................the dentist because she (have)...................a
toothache.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 243
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh
5, My mother (not like)......................( watch).........................series.
III/ Make questions, using the words given . (2m)
1, We usually stay at home on Sundays.
-
When........................................................................................................................
.....
2, I like watching cartoons.
-
What.........................................................................................................................
.....
3, She played table tennis twice a week.
- How
often.....................................................................................................................
4, Mr. Lam went to home at 7 o’clock.
- What
time....................................................................................................................
IV/ Read the text carefully and answer the questions. (2m)
Last year, my school organized a club “walking for fun’’. Most students
enjoy taking part in this club. The regular activity of the club is a 5 km walk to the
beach on Sunday morning. Another activity is a walk- to- school day (WTS).
Members living near school volunteer to take a walk every Wednesday.
1, What did your school organized last
year? ..............................................................
2, Do most students enjoy taking part in this
club? ..............................................
3, How far is it from the school to the
beach? .........................................................
4, Who often take part in WTS
day? ........................................................................
V/ Make new sentences, use the cue words . (2m)
1, Lan/ not like/ watch/ sports on TV.
.................................................................................................................................
........
2, I/ prefer/ plays/ series.
.................................................................................................................................
........
3, She/ play/ badminton/ last year.
.................................................................................................................................
.......
4, You/ should/ wash/ hands/ meals/ every day.
Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 244
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 – NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THCS Yªn §ång –
HuyÖn Yªn M« - Tnhr Ninh B×nh




Ngêi thiÕt kÕ: NguyÔn Quang Hoµ - Trêng THS Yªn §ång 245
HuyÖn Yªn M«- TØnh Ninh B×nh Tel: 030836061 -Mobil: 0946083699
Đề thi vào lớp 10 môn Toán |  Đáp án đề thi tốt nghiệp |  Đề thi Đại học |  Đề thi thử đại học môn Hóa |  Mẫu đơn xin việc |  Bài tiểu luận mẫu |  Ôn thi cao học 2014 |  Nghiên cứu khoa học |  Lập kế hoạch kinh doanh |  Bảng cân đối kế toán |  Đề thi chứng chỉ Tin học |  Tư tưởng Hồ Chí Minh |  Đề thi chứng chỉ Tiếng anh
Theo dõi chúng tôi
Đồng bộ tài khoản